Metis Documentation - User contributions [en]

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2013-10-01T10:57:09Z

Adminwiki: addition of videos

* Navigation
** mainpage | Home Page
** Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quotes User Manual
** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page|Metis Smart Modeling User Manual
** How_To_Use_Metis_Smart_Quotes | Metis Smart Quotes Videos
** How_To_Use_Metis_Smart_Modeling | Metis Smart Modeling Videos - General Part
** How_To_Work_With_Models_With_Metis_Smart_Modeling | Metis Smart Modeling Videos - Modeling Part

* SEARCH

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2013-10-01T09:14:03Z

Adminwiki: Order and deletion of 3 manuals

Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page

2011-12-19T08:28:08Z

Adminwiki: /* Menus */

== License ==

TBD

== Log In ==

The first time the application is launched, the following window appears:

[[File:MetisSetupSQLParameters.PNG‎|center|360x370px]]

To be able to use the application, information regarding the database must be provided. Enter the server name and the database name that was created for Metis Smart Modeling. If not filled-in, enter the SQL server login credentials then click on the ''Save'' button. These information are stored and the login window appears.

'''Note:''' Carefully check the parameters before clicking on the ''Save'' button. In case of mistake, it is not possible to edit again these parameters from this window.

Metis Smart Modeling is password protected as shown below:

[[File:MetisLoginWindow.PNG‎|center|360x370px]]

Enter the correct credentials to start Metis Smart Modeling.

If the user fails to provide correct credentials four consecutive times, the login window closes.

If a version as been set as a version without an administrator, no Metis Smart Modeling users are permitted to log into that version.

== Layout ==

The section provides an overview of:
* Metis Graphic User Interface
* Buttons and icons which are commons to all the menus

=== Graphic User Interface ===

Metis Smart Modeling graphic user interface can be divided into 5 main parts as shown below:

[[File:MetisSmartModeling5Zones.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

# The top buttons area
# The main menus area
# The submenus area
# The search and/or filter area
# The core information area

The top buttons consists of the following button:
* Setup: to define some settings and preferences when using the application
* Data: to synchronize data on a central database or a local database, to import and export data, etc.
* Close session: to exit the application
* About Metis Smart Modeling: to get information about the application's version, the version in which the user is currently logged-in, etc.

The menu tabs allow the user to navigate through the application. The list of available menus are described in a separate section (see below).

The search and/or filter function provides a means to access to a piece of information quickly.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Metis_Smart_Modeling_Overview.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Overview of Metis Smart Modeling Graphic User Interface.
}}

=== Buttons and Icons ===

The following table describes the buttons and the icons which are common to all menus:

{| style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To add an element
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To delete an element
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To edit an element
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingPreviewButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To preview an element. No edition is permitted in the preview window.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingOKButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To save the edits that may have been made and exit
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingCancelButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To cancel the edits that may have been made and exit
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingCloseButton.PNG|28x28px|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To close the window (generally the Preview window)
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingSemiLockedIcon.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The element can partially be edited (i.e. the description in most of the cases)
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingLockedIcon.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The element cannot be edited or deleted
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:SortArrowDown2.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To sort the contents of a table in descending order
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:SortArrowUp.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To sort the contents of a table in ascending order
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MagnifyingGlass.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
To search for an item within a table
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | [[File:ResizeSearchFilterArea.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
To resize the search or the filter area
|-
|}

== Menus ==

Metis Smart Modeling consists of the following main menus:

* [[Description of the Menu Versions | Versions]]
* [[Description of the Menu Languages | Languages]]
* [[Description of the Menu Users | Users]]
* [[Description of the Menu Positions | Positions]]
* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Attributes | Attributes]]
* [[Description of the Menu Hierarchies | Hierarchies]]
* [[Description of the Menu Prices | Prices]]
* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Systems | Systems]]
* [[Description of the Menu Documents | Documents]]
* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Modeling | Modeling]]
* [[Description of the Menu Data Management | Data Management]]
* [[Description of the Menu Profiles | Profiles]]

Each menus are described in their respective sections.

== How to? ==

* [[Metis Smart Modeling - How To? | Metis Smart Modeling - How To?]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling

2011-12-19T08:27:28Z

Adminwiki:

Metis Smart Modeling allows the definition of models, which are then used in Metis Smart Quote to establish offers containing automatically generated positions (material and services) according to predefined parameters, rules and user input.

The goal of defining models is to ease the work of Metis Smart Quote users during the definition phase of offers. Each business requires a very complex know-how, thus the definition of predefined models enables the user to configure up to 100% technically valid offers based on the vast selection of products and services available. It allows them to concentrate on core information and save time by letting the application make all the complex calculations and configuration validation.

This part of the Metis Smart Modeling Manual will guide the reader through all different menus and functionalities available in the application in order for him to achieve the creation of a complete model using rules, masks and all related objects.

The Modeling menu consists of the following sub-menus:

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Models | Models]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Masks | Masks]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Group of Rules | Group of Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Rules | Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Check Rules | Check Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Variables | Variables]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Linked Values | Linked Values]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Debug | Debug]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Additional considerations to models | Additional considerations to models]]

Each sub-menus are described in their respective sections.

Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling

2011-12-19T08:27:04Z

Adminwiki:

Metis Smart Modeling allows the definition of models, which are then used in Metis Smart Quote to establish offers containing automatically generated positions (material and services) according to predefined parameters, rules and user input.

The goal of defining models is to ease the work of Metis Smart Quote users during the definition phase of offers. Each business requires a very complex know-how, thus the definition of predefined models enables the user to configure up to 100% technically valid offers based on the vast selection of products and services available. It allows them to concentrate on core information and save time by letting the application make all the complex calculations and configuration validation.

This part of the Metis Smart Modeling Manual will guide the reader through all different menus and functionalities available in the application in order for him to achieve the creation of a complete model using rules, masks and all related objects.

The Modeling menu consists of the following sub-menus:

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Models | Models]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Masks | Masks]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Group of Rules | Group of Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Rules | Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Check Rules | Check Rules]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Variables | Variables]]

* [[Metis_Smart_Modeling_-_Linked Values | Linked Values]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Debug | Debug]]

* [[Additional considerations to models | Additional considerations to models]]

Each sub-menus are described in their respective sections.

Additional considerations to models

2011-12-19T08:13:18Z

Adminwiki: moved Additional considerations to models to Metis Smart Modeling - Additional considerations to models

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Additional considerations to models]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Additional considerations to models

2011-12-19T08:13:18Z

Adminwiki: moved Additional considerations to models to Metis Smart Modeling - Additional considerations to models

== Limits linked to systems ==
Using the limits defined on a system description is a key aspects of the modelization of [[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems#Creating_a_group_of_systems|group of systems]]. Those limits will be used by Metis Smart Quotes to display the results of the systems in the group and show the ones which have been "crossed". Implementing them on the different systems is a must in order for the end-user to make an informed selection of the appropriate system for his customer.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsLimits.PNG|center|706x860px]]

By defining setting on the group of system, the application will run through all models linked to the systems included in the group. The results are then summarized in the screen above. The more limits have been defined for each system, the better the summary in Metis Smart Quotes, thus the more informed the choice made by the end-user.

For more information about limits please visit the [[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems#Limits|corresponding section]].

== System pictures ==
During the modelization process of systems, thoughts should be given the visualization of those systems in Metis Smart Quotes. Metis allows to set different pictures for one system conditionally based on a variable.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsPictures.PNG|center|706x860px]]

For more information about system pictures please visit the corresponding [[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems#Pictures|section]].

== Attributes linked to positions ==
Using attributes in models, instantiation, considerations.

For more information about attributes please visit the corresponding [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|section]].

== Influence of prices in the models ==
When more than one result is obtained from the models, it will automatically select the least expensive one! Great care should be given to the debugging of models as results may vary based on the prices stored in the database. For instance for a position, its price could be different for every price category. This means that the result of a formula, which can select between multiple solutions, like the optimum rule, the same inputs may produce different outputs depending on the price category selected either in Metis Smart Quotes or in the debugging mode.

== Debugging a model ==
Using Metis Smart Quote to debug a model, letting users report issues.

Description of the Sub-Menu Debug

2011-12-19T08:12:56Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Debug to Metis Smart Modeling - Debug

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Debug]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Debug

2011-12-19T08:12:56Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Debug to Metis Smart Modeling - Debug

A debugger or debugging tool is included in Metis Smart Modeling. It is used to test and debug Models. The debugger also offer more sophisticated functions such as running a model step by step (single-stepping or program animation), stopping (breaking) (pausing the program to examine the current state) at some event or specified instruction by means of a breakpoint, and tracking the values of some variables.

The importance of a debugger in Metis Smart Modeling cannot be overstated. Indeed, the existence and quality of such a tool supports precise and technically valid models within the environment. The tool expands over the two main applications in the Metis Environment. This means that a model can be executed in Metis Smart Quotes and afterwards debugged in Metis Smart Modeling.

== Debugging a model ==
Window description

Example of errors or problems which can be detected using the debugger :
* Incorrect results :
Use the "Output Values & Watchdogs" list in order to determine at the end of the execution process the values which should be "calculated" through the used models. To solve this type of issues, validate all rules which will generate output and add-ons.
* Incorrect intermediate values :
During the execution of a model, the values for variables and positions may change based on the rules. This could mean that throughout the execution, such object may receive a value that is not planned or wished. Verify thoroughly all rules which use identical object that see if incoherence may appears during the execution. For example, create temporary variable which will only be used during an execution.
* Execution order issues :
Within a model the order of the various groups of rules which are executed is key. Errors may occur if groups are executed in the wrong order. Verify all the processes to be executed within a model to ensure that the order is relevant.
* Rights on defined objects :
The results of the debugger is dependent on the rights and profiles applicable to the user logged in Metis Smart Quotes. This means that The availability of certain attributes, price categories, variants or hierarchies will have a great influence of the calculated results. The cause of such issue may just be that the end-user doesn't have access to part of the objects used in the model.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCDebug.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{| style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Button
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugStartButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To start the step-by-step execution of the imported environment.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugStopButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To stop the step-by-step execution of the imported environment.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugNextButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To move to the next step of the execution list.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugNextBPButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To execute the imported environment until the next break-point.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugLookForButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To search for a specific string within the execution list.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugPrRuleButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To preview the selected rule.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugImpFileButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | To import another Metis debugger file for testing it in Metis Smart Modeling.
|-
|}

{{Note
| For details on icons used in the execution process table, please refer to Metis Smart Quotes icon library and to the modeling icon library.
}}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Breakpoint'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugBPButton.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Indicates that a break-point has be set on this execution line or output object (variable or position).
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Watchdog'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugWDButton.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Indicates that a watchdog is set stop the execution when a change occur to it.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Filter Icon'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugFilterButton.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |

|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Orange Plus Icon'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingDebugOPlusButton.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |

|-
|}

== Using Metis Smart Quote ==
The main concept within the debug tool included in Metis Smart Modeling is to be able to execute a model within Metis Smart Quotes, observe an issue and to be able to execute the same model with the same input value within Metis Smart Modeling in order to catch possible errors.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCDebug3.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| Because the debugger within Metis Smart Modeling uses an execution of a model within Metis Smart Quotes, it is possible to for Metis Smart Quotes users to send to model developers a faulty execution for debugging. This fonctionnality can be activated on a profile basis.
}}

To begin, open an existing project and an existing offer in Metis Smart Quotes. The selected offer has been configured in the design menu.
The model has automatically been executed when clicking on the price menu.
A debug file can now be generated from the Price menu.
Click on the “More” button and select “Debug Mode.” An explorer window opens with the created debug file. This file can now be read in Smart Modeling.
Now in Smart Modeling, make sure to be in the “Modeling” menu, then click on the “debug” sub-menu.
An explorer window opens where the debug file can be selected and then opened.
Once opened, the debug sub-menu appears. Under the top table, click on “expand all.”
Information about the price category, the models or the rules is displayed. It is possible to see the details about a rule. For example, select the rule “Configure basic hardware based on CPU choice (low).”
Preview the rule by either clicking on the “Rule Preview” button or by double clicking on the selected rule.
The rule window opens showing details about the rule. Close this window.
In the second table below, the first tab “Output Values and Watchdogs,” lists all output variables and positions used by the models.
The user can also set a “watchdog” to a position or a variable. A “watchdog” can be considered as a breakpoint. When executing the model using the “Start” and “Next Break point” buttons, the process continues until the “watchdog” position or variable is encountered.
The second tab lists the input values which were defined in the mask in Smart Quotes.
Click on the “Start” button to execute the model. Click on the next button to execute the rules of the model, step by step.
The result values associated with the execution of the rules are displayed in the table “output values and watchdogs” below.
Clicking on the “Stop” button stops the model execution and the values disappear.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/f/f3/VID_DebugTool.PNG'>File:Debug Tool OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Using Metis Smart Quotes to test a full model, importing the environment in Metis Smart Modeling and running the step-by-step execution on the it.
}}

== Running a model step-by-step ==
The Metis Smart Modeling Debugger is based on step-by-step executor of the imported environment. Once opened, the complete offer exported from Metis Smart Quotes can be executed one step after the other. This allows to verify thoroughly and in details where an error may have occurred. Based on the execution list and on the "Output Values and Watchdogs" list, the evolution of the "calculation" and results can be examined at every step.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCDebug2.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| For a demonstration on how to use the Step-by-step mode of the debugger, please refer to the video in the previous section of this manual.
}}

=== Using breakpoints ===
The debugger tool included in Metis Smart Modeling allows to set breakpoints throughout the execution of an imported Metis Smart Quotes environment. Those breakpoints can be used to stop a step-by-step execution at a specific place or time of the offer. For example at the beginning of one of the systems included in the offer or when a specific variable changes value. This can be very useful to pinpoint a problem in a model based on certain values.

There are two different types of breakpoints which can be defined within the debugger :

1. '''In the execution steps'''

In the Metis Smart Modeling debugger window, the top table shows the complete content of the imported environment (Offer, system and applications, models used, group of rules and rules which are executed). Each line listed in the table represents one of the steps of the execution process. Break-point can be set of any of those lines simply by clicking once the leftmost "grayed" column of the table. this add a small red dot to the line showing the user that the step-by-step will stop before executing this line in the process.

In order to jump from one break-point the other, use the "Next Break-point" button.

To remove a break-point from the execution list, click of the small red dot in from of the line. The execution will then execute until the next one or the end of the list.

2. '''On a variable or position'''

Additionally to stopping the execution of the imported environment at a specific place or moment of the execution, Metis Smart Modeling also allows to set break-point on variable, positions and group of items. This can be done by using the "output Values & Watchdogs" table. Simply click in the leftmost column of the item which should stop the execution. Metis Smart modeling will then pause the execution process when the value stored with the item changes due to a rule. By looking at the execution list, the specific operation which applied this change can be viewed.

{{Note
| Breakpoints on variable or positions are very helpful to test and verify that it is not modified when not required.
}}

=== Using watchdogs ===
Within the list of of "Output Values & Watchdogs" are only shown the variables, positions and groups of items which are either used as an output or an add-on to any rule included in the environment. In order to work on variables or positions which could be used as inputs or filters, Metis Smart Modeling allows the user define so called watchdogs. They are variables, positions or attributes which are not listed in the previously named table but which could be used in rules as either input values or filters.

In order to define a new watchdog within the debugger, click on the ADD button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]] located on the right of the "Output Values & Watchdogs" table. A window opens up which allows to select the position, the variable (or group of items) or attribute to be used as a watchdog. Select the appropriate one and validate in order for it to be listed in the table. Once done, move to the XX column of the inserted element and set the value for which it should be tested. When the execution process starts, and at each step, the watchdog will be tested against the value provided. If equal, then the execution pauses.

In order to remove a watchdog from the list, use the MINUS button on the right of the table.

{{Note
| Watchdogs on variable or positions are very helpful to test and verify that a given variable or position is not modified prior to being used as an input to another rule.
}}

Description of the Sub-Menu Linked Values

2011-12-19T08:12:24Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Linked Values to Metis Smart Modeling - Linked Values

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Linked Values]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Linked Values

2011-12-19T08:12:24Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Linked Values to Metis Smart Modeling - Linked Values

The Linked Values section allows the definition of values to be linked to basic Metis elements like the types of offers, systems and variants used in models. These values affect the masks and rules employed by the models and allow them to use for example the type of an offer as an input in a rule.

== What is a linked value? ==
A linked value is basically a value given to a Metis Offer element in order for it to be used as an input for rules or masks. The best way to describe this is trough an example. Two different offer types have been defined in Metis Smart Modeling. "New" which is to be used for complete system offering and "spare parts" which is to be used when offering individual components. By affecting value for those two different type to a variable, this same variable can then be used in masks and/or models to have an influence on the execution of a model. In this case, it would as simple as letting the Metis Smart Quotes user select all components to be offered instead of configuring them via the rules, but leaving the compatibility checking rules be executed.

It is possible to link one variable to each offer, system and variant type defined in Metis Smart Modeling. Thus enabling the administrator to modify the behavior of a single model based on those end-user selections or presets.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCLinked Values.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

List of elements to which a variable can be linked :

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Element
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Description
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Link
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Offer Type'''
| width="65%" style="text-align:left; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Offer type allows the Metis Smart Quote user to set the kind of offer which will be created in the application. The linked value functionality will allow the use of the select type as a variable in models and masks.
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Offer_Types|Work with Offer Types]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''System'''
| width="65%" style="text-align:left; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
A system is a logical entity which is the building block of an offer in Metis Smart Quote. The linked value functionality will allow the use of the select system as a variable in models and masks.
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems|Work with Systems]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Variant'''
| width="65%" style="text-align:left; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Variants help users to better manage different options of products and services. The linked value functionality will allow the use of the select variant as a variable in models and masks.
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
[[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Variants|Work with Variants]]
|-
|}

{{Tip
| Use a linked value to modify the result of a model based on the type of offer.
}}

'''Example of Use:'''
Based on a unique model to configure a desktop PC, the services required to put together the machine can be disabled when the offer type "spare parts" has been selected. Simply add a rule using the linked value defined in the service model to disable the the "manufacturing" of the machine.

== Creating a linked value ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Linked Values” sub-menu. Here the application displays a list of all Metis elements to which a variable can be linked. Select the element to which a linked value needs to be created, for example “Offer Type”. Click on “Edit" [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The “Linked Values” window opens. Select the variable to which the element needs to be linked, for example “$Offer_Type”. If the required variable doesn't appears in the list use the ADD button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]] on the right of the drop-down list to create a new one. Please refer to the variable section of this manual for additional details.

Based on the selected Metis element (in this case "Offer Type"), below the drop-down list to select the variable Metis will display a list of defined values for the this element. Refer to the corresponding section linked above to define the content of those lists.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCLinked Values2.PNG|center|850x860px]]

The concept of linked values in Metis Smart Modeling and Smart Quotes is to set values to variables for standard offer settings. In this case the offer type. As pictured above, here Metis includes 2 types of offers which can be created (new and spare parts). When the wished variable is set in the drop-dwon list, it is possible to assign a value to each offer type. For example 1 and 2. Click on confirm to save the changes. The Linked value has been updated and now appears with its link to a variable in the list of the main screen.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/f/fa/VID_LinkedValues.PNG'>File:Defining linked values OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Definition and setup of a Linked Value.
}}

{{Note
| The number and the entries themselves which are displayed in the list showing the content of the various Metis elements can vary based on the data defined and activated throughout the application.
}}

== Modifying a linked value ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Linked Values” sub-menu. Here the application displays a list of all Metis elements to which a variable can be linked. Select the element to which a linked value needs to be modified, for example “Offer Type”. Click on “Edit" [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The “Linked Values” window opens. For changing the variable linked to the Metis element, select it from the drop-down list, for example “$Offer_Type”. If the required variable doesn't appears in the list use the ADD button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]] on the right of the drop-down list to create a new one. Please refer to the variable section of this manual for additional details.
When the wished variable is set in the drop-dwon list, it is possible to modify the values for each offer type. For example 3 and 4. Click on confirm to save the changes. The Linked value has been updated and now appears with its link to a variable in the list of the main screen.

{{Note
| Changing the variable linked to a Metis element will not affect the values previously entered in the current window.
}}

{{Warning
| Changing the variable linked to a Metis element will on the other hand affect the model(s) in which this variable is used.
}}

== Deleting a linked value ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Linked Values” sub-menu. Here the application displays a list of all Metis elements to which a variable can be linked. Select the element for which the link needs to be deleted, for example “Offer Type”. Click on “Edit" [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The “Linked Values” window opens. In order to remove the link to the current variable select "<none>" in the drop-down list. In order to remove the values set for each values of the element, select the value in the right-hand column and delete it. Click on confirm to save the changes. The Linked value has been updated and now appears with its link to a variable in the list of the main screen.

Description of the Sub-Menu Variables

2011-12-19T08:12:03Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Variables to Metis Smart Modeling - Variables

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Variables]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Variables

2011-12-19T08:12:03Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Variables to Metis Smart Modeling - Variables

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableGroupIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
A symbolic name associated with a value and whose associated value may be changed.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Group of items'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Represents a higher level than variables, which can include variables as well as positions.
|-
|}

== What is a variable? ==
A variable is a symbolic name given to some quantity, for the purpose of allowing the name to be used independently of the information it represents. The scope of a variable is local to the model it is used in. On the other hand, its extend is limited to the Group of Rules its used as an input or output. The value linked to a variable may change during the execution of a model.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCVariablesList.PNG|center|850x860px]]

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! colspan="2" scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Variables can be used for the following "tasks" in Metis Smart Modeling:
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Systems'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Limits : As object and filter for setting limits on systems.

Default Configuration : As object representing base configuration for systems.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Masks'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Links : As target for values given to most field types which can be inserted in masks.

Dependencies : As conditions for field display in masks.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Rules'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Filter : As conditions to execute a rule.

Rule : As input or output of the execution part of a rule.

Add-on : As additional output of a rule.
|-
|}

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCVariables1.PNG|center|850x860px]]

* '''Name''' (mandatory)
A description for the variable.
* '''Comment - Title'''
Title for the comment which can be given to a variable.
* '''Comment - Description'''
Description for the comment which can be given to a variable. This comment is very useful to better describe the variables.

{{Tip
| Variables can be defined within most part of the Metis Smart Modeling application where variable are used. This means that variables can be created as needed. Be careful not to generate redundancy or ignore the list when associating a variable with an object, a rule or a mask.
}}

== What is a group of items? ==
A group of items represents a higher level than variables. It may contain variables, materials, and most importantly groups of items themselves. This higher level is very useful when assembling different types of variables. The value linked with a group of variable once used will be the addition of the values linked to its content. Meaning that if a group of items includes two different variables holding each 3 and 5 as values, the value of the group will be 8.

When used in a rule or model, it works the same way as a simple variable. The only difference is that the output of a rule (or add-on) cannot be applied on a group of items . The can only be used as input.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! colspan="2" scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Groups of items can be used for the following "tasks" in Metis Smart Modeling:
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Systems'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Limits : As object and filter for setting limits on systems.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Masks'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Dependencies : As conditions for field display in masks.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Rules'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Filter : As conditions to execute a rule.

Rule : As input of the execution part of a rule.
|-
|}

The content of a group of items can be defined as a list of elements which will be added to determine the value stored in the group. Each element of the list can be either a position, a variable or a group of items. For each of those, a factor can be defined in order to multiply their value.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCVariables2.PNG|center|850x860px]]

* '''Name''' (mandatory)
A name for the group of items.
* '''Content''' (mandatory)
List which specifies the content of the group of items. It can contain either positions, variables or other group of items.
* '''Comment'''
A comment can be given to all group of items. Please refer to the description of variables for details.

{{Note
| There is a limit to the number of levels of groups of items inside groups of items. It is set to 10.
}}

Using the "test" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingTestButton.PNG|link=]] displayed on the main variable screen, it is possible to have an overview of the group of items. The functionality is intended to enable the user to analyze the content of on group. Fro example, if a group of items includes other groups, the test window will display dismantle the object down to individual variables and positions. This allows the user to validate the construction of any group of items created in Metis Smart Modeling. The list displayed in the window also show the factors defined on the elements included in the group.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCGroupOfRulesTest.PNG|center|850x860px]]

{{Warning
| The test window doesn't allow to simulate values being given to the various elements.
}}

== Creating a new variable and group of items==
To create a variable in the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Variables” sub-menu has been selected.
Click on the “add” button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
A small window opens with “variable” and “group of items” as the two create options.
Select “Variable” and confirm to continue.
This opens the “Variable” window.
In the “Name” field, enter a name for the variable. For example, “$SelectChoice.”
A title and description can also be entered to better describe the use of the variable.
Click on confirm. The new variable is now added to the list.
Now, to create a group of items, click once again on the “add” button.
This time, choose “Group of Items” and confirm.
In the “Name” field, enter for example, “$NB_Screens.”
Next, click on the “add” button. It is possible to add positions, variables or attributes.
Make sure that “positions” is selected at the top.
Now, use the search filter to find the desired positions.
For example, in the “Description” field, enter “LCD” and click on “Filter.”
The search results appear.
Tick the checkbox for the desired items and then click on confirm.
The selected items now appear in the “Content” tab.
Click on the “comment” tab.
Here a title and description can be entered to better describe the use of the group of items.
Click on confirm to save the new group of items. The group of items is now created.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_variable_and_group_of_items_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and definition of a variable and a group of items.
}}

{{Note
| When defining variables, it is very useful to not only provide a description and a comment but also to define a "syntax" throughout all the variable which are created (for example: start a boolean value with a "b" and numerical values with an "n").
}}

== Modifying a variable and group of items==

In the “modeling” menu, make sure to select the “variables” sub-menu. Select the variable or group of items to be edited. Modification of the object can be done through the use of the EDIT button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. Please refer to the definition of variables and/or groups for further information on the various fields which can be setup.

{{Note| When a variable is renamed, it is still valid anywhere it is used (masks, systems and rules). Links are only broken when deleted!
}}

== Deleting a variable and group of items” ==
In the “modeling” menu, make sure to select the “variables” sub-menu. Select the variable or group of items to be removed. Deletion of a variable can be done through the use of the DELETE button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. When deleting a variable or a group of items, its reference in rules and/or mask will be lost. Thus it is very important to verify if the deleted object is used anywhere in a model.

{{Warning
| Deleted variables or groups will render the masks and rules to which they are linked unusable!
}}

{{Note
| In order to verify a rule or a group of rules for missing variables, use the "Validate" function available under to Group of rules" sub-menu. This functionality will display any errors appearing in the selected group of rules.
}}

Description of the Sub-Menu Check Rules

2011-12-19T08:11:44Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Check Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Check Rules

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Check Rules]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Check Rules

2011-12-19T08:11:44Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Check Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Check Rules

== Checking Rules ==

In opposition to the other menu items of the modeling menu, Check Rules doesn't display its functionalities in the main window. Clicking on the icon opens up a new window. It displays a list of rules in which issues have been found by Metis Smart Modeling. The content of the list is structured based on the following information:

* '''ID'''
Identification number of the listed rule.
* '''Icon'''
Icon specifying the [[Description of the Sub-Menu Rules#Rule_types|rule type]].
* '''Description'''
Name of the rule
* '''Date'''
Date on which the rule was last modified.
* '''Filter'''
This column will display a warning sign if there is an error in the filter part of the listed rule.
* '''IN'''
This column will display a warning sign if there is an error in the input part of the listed rule.
* '''OUT'''
This column will display a warning sign if there is an error in the output part of the listed rule.
* '''Add'''
This column will display a warning sign if there is an error in the Add-on part of the listed rule.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCCheckRules.PNG|center|700x600px]]

In terms of tools and functionnalities, the window allows not only to have an overview over the possible errors, but corrective measures can also be taken when an error is displayed. In order to modify a rule, it should be selected in the list and by clicking the "Edit" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]] the selected rule is displayed in the standard rule definition window. The user can then apply the required corrections and validate his changes. Refer to the "Rules" section of this manual for more information.

In order to close the Check Rules window, simply click the validation button in the bottom.

Description of the Sub-Menu Rules

2011-12-19T08:11:21Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Rules

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Rules]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Rules

2011-12-19T08:11:21Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Rules

In the Metis environment, a rule is a determinate method for performing a logical or mathematical operation and obtaining a certain result which is the building block of the modeling part (configurator). It is based on a simple structure and logic which can be used in an endless number of cases and will suit most of the requirements for material and service configuration.

== What is a rule? ==
[[Image:Model_Exec_3.png|thumb|upright=0.5|alt=Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description|Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description]]
Based on the model execution scheme, rules fit inside of group of rules in Metis. They are the logical part of the execution process. As described in the model section, once a group of rules is executed, all variables are instantiated and only after this the rules are executed. In opposition to groups of rules inside a model, rules don't have a specific order in which they are
Detailed description of a rule and its components.

Link to the execution process of models.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRulesDef2.PNG|center|706x860px]]

A rule is typically made out of three different parts which can work together :

1. '''Description''' : Main information regarding the rule.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; background-color : transparent;"
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Type''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Allows to define the type rule will take and modify the 'Formula' part of the rule. (mandatory)
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''ID''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Once the rule has been saved, the ID field will automatically be completed by Metis Smart Modeling. The generated identification code is unique worldwide and can be useful for searching for a rule or debugging it, if necessary. (mandatory, but generated automatically upon validation)
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Comment''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
When creating a new rule, the user must enter a comment, or short description, that will be displayed on reports and lists. (mandatory)
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Description''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
A long description ca be given to all rules defined within Metis Smart Modeling.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Round output down''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If this checkbox is ticked, any fractions of output resulting from a rule will not be taken into account. This means that the result will only be composed of whole units. This applies in particular when using a formula based rule.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Mandatory External Control (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Mandatory Controls, simply by the presence of a system name, are considered to be applied on the offer level. The influence in Metis Smart Quotes is that it will still be possible to view and print offer documents for the Metis Smart Quotes end user until an external configurator control can be performed. There is no icon to represent the Mandatory Control applied on the offer level.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Mandatory External Control (Order)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Mandatory Controls, simply by the presence of a system name, are considered to be applied on the order level. The influence in Metis Smart Quotes is that the ordering process will be blocked for the Metis Smart Quotes end user until an external configurator control can be performed, but it will still be possible to view and print offer documents. There is no icon to represent the Mandatory Control applied on the order level.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
''Mandatory Internal Control (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Mandatory Control intended for systems which do not have system names. They require Metis Smart Quotes end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems will have to be performed manually by an especially authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like Mandatory Control. Will be applied on the offer level. It is basically the same as the Mandatory Internal Control (Order) with the added restriction that it will not be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Mandatory Internal Control (Order)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Mandatory Controls intended for systems which do not have system names. Similar to the above Mandatory Control, they also require Metis Smart Quotes end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems will have to be performed manually by an specifically authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like White Flags. Will be applied on the order level, meaning that the ordering process will be blocked for the Metis Smart Quotes end user until a manual control can be performed. It will still be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents, however.
|-
| colspan="2" width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : white; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''External Controls''' (ProductName)
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Internal Controls''' (no ProductName)
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Applied on the '''Order Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until manual control has been completed.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Applied on the '''Offer Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until manual control has been competed.
|-
|}
|-
|}

{{Note
| Whether the Grey Flag has been placed on the order level or offer level, there will be no difference in the display in QSBW. The same small yellow icon will be displayed for either one.
}}

{{Note
| Only one type of Grey Flag can be active on a rule at a time.
}}

{{Note
| The White Flag (Offer) and a Grey Flag can be active on the same rule at the same time. However, Grey Flags will not have any influence on a system which has a system name. Systems which have a system name will only take into account whether or not the White Flag (Offer) has been applied. Conversely, the White Flag (Offer) setting will have no influence on systems which do not have a system name.
}}

2. '''Filter''' : Part of the rule which allow to configure the circumstances in which the rule is valid and should be executed by the application. Enabling the rule only under specific conditions
The Variable Filter validates the rule according to variables, products, or groups of variables.

To select a new variable, select a line and click to enter. Give the name, or part of the name of your parameter or a space to select all and click “ENTER.”

3. '''Formula''' : It is the logical or mathematical part of a rule. Setting up the rule, please refer to the various formula types for detailed description of how to setup each of them.

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

4. '''Add-On's'''' : Based on the result provide by the Formula part, a rule can be set-up to add implied positions or define new values in variables. Additional results from the rule based on the result of the "formula"

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

A rule may use the following items in its different parts :

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Object
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Positions'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingPositionIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
material and service '''Positions''' (input and output) can be used as a parameter (taking into account the quantity) or as output (setting the quantity through the execution of the formula)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attributes'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
()
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input only) [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]] values added over the complete offer can be used as input for rules
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input and output) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account its value) or as an output in the formula or add-on part of a rule (the obtained value will be set to the variable)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Group of variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableGroupIcon.png‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
(input only) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account the sum of all the positions and variables it includes)
|-
|}

Because rules are essentially based on value given to variables and /or positions, most of the numerical information which needs to be given when defining a rule is placed quantity fields:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Value
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q from'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the lower limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q from" value is 5, then the rule will provide an output. The "Q from" value can also be considered as a base value for the system in which the model is used.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q to'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the upper limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q to" value is 4, then the rule will not provide an output.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q in'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Q out'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
|}

{{Warning
| [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|Attributes]] do not hold any values in material models.
}}

== Rule types ==

Rules which can be configured in Metis are divided into 7 categories:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type of rule
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Single selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleSIngle.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The [[#Single_Selection|Single Selection]] rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Table selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleTable.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Table_Selection|Table Selection]] is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Optimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleOptimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of an [[#Optimal_Selection|optimal rule]] is to automatically select of the best alternative depending on the input quantity required and the related price.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Maximal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMaximal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
In [[#Maximal_Selection|this type]] of rule each line will be used as a single criterion and Metis will return the lowest result possible.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Minimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMinimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
In [[#Minimal_Selection|this type]] of rule each line will be used as a single criterion and Metis will return the lowest result possible.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Formula selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleFormula.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Formulas|formula based rule]] is to use arithmetic and logic function to calculate an output for a rule.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''External selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleExternal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The goal of an [[#External_Selection|external rule]] is to use a third party application (software) to calculate the output of a rule.
|-
|}

{{Warning
| Changing the type of an existing rule will not reset its content (filter, inputs, outputs and add-ons). Be careful when doing such changes and review all parts of the rule before saving it. Metis Smart Modeling will discard all changes which do not apply to the new type when validating then in the rule edition window. The change cannot be reverted.
}}

=== Single Selection ===
The single selection rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation. The Input "object" can be of any type available, but the output one can only be a position or a variable. If the input is set to be a variable, its value may come directly from a field placed in a mask or a default value. The output quantity ("Q out") is determined by the input quantity ("Q in"). If they are both set to "1", then for every number of input there will be an output. On the other hand, if the "Q out" fields is set to 2, it means that for every input there will be 2 output.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleSingle.PNG‎|center|700x600px]]

{{Warning
| Beware that if the "Q in" field is left empty, the output will be equal to the input. The output value will always be equal to the input value, for any “Q in” value.
}}

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

A filter or limit to the execution of the rule can be set with the "Q from" and "Q to" fields by giving a scope in which the input/output relation should be executed. If the "Q from" field is left empty, this means that the rule is valid for input values greater or equal than 0. An d if the "Q to" field is also left empty, then it means that the rule is valid up to infinite input values.

{{Note
| Only the input value will be considered by the range filter.
}}

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “D-Basic Hardware.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “Single” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter a name for the rule, for example, “Configure Memory.”
The goal of this example rule is to generate the number of memory modules required based on the desired quantity of memory provided in a mask.
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes. Select “Variables.”
Select “$Memory” from the list and confirm.
Click on the add button near the “Output” field. The same window from before opens, but it is only possible to select positions or variables. In this example a position is added.
In the description field, enter “ddr” and click on filter.
Select “DDR2 1GB” from the list and confirm.
In the field “Q in” enter the value “1.”
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.
The test window opens.
In the “test value” field for “$Memory” enter “4.”
Click on the test button. The results appear below.
In this example the result value is also “4” because “Q in” and “Q out” were both set to“1.”
Close the test window.
Now click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Output will have the same quantity as Input.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
5
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
1 output will be added to each group of 5 units of input.
If Q in = 3, Q out = 1

If Q in = 8, Q out = 2

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3

If the parameter ‘No Treatment of the rest' is activated, the result would be:
If Q in = 3, Q out = 0

If Q in = 8, Q out = 1

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_single_rule_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Definition of a single rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

=== Table Selection===
The goal is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values. The rule allows to enter several 'Q from' and 'Q to' to determine those ranges. They each then induce a specific 'Q out' which will be used as a quantity for the output.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleTable.PNG‎|center|700x600px]]

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “rules” sub-menu.
To create a new rule, first select an existing group of rules from the drop down list. For example, “s-basic enhancements.”
Then click on the “Add” button. A window opens where the rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “table.”
In this particular example, a condition is first set to execute the rule only if a variable has a value greater than 0.
Then, an output quantity will depend upon an input value entered in a mask.
In the “comment” field, enter “Define RAID Type.”
Additional comments can be entered in the box below the “comment” field if desired.
Click on the “add” button for the “filter” section.
A new window opens. It is possible to add positions, variables or attributes. Select “variables.”
In the variables list, select “$HasRAID.” Then click on confirm.
The variable is now added to the filter variable table.
In the “filter variables” section, change the “Condition” to “greater than.”
The main part of the rule is shown by the blue and red colored sections in the middle of the window, where the inputs and outputs can be entered.
The purpose of this rule is to determine which RAID configuration will be setup in the system based on the selection done in a mask.

To do so, click on the “add” button for the “Input” section.
The same window from before opens. Select “variables” and select “$RAID_Type” from the list.
Click on confirm. The variable is added to the input field.
Click on the “add” button for the “output” section.
The same window from before opens. Select “variables.”
Select “$NB_HDD” from the list and confirm to continue. The variable is added to the output field.
The requirement for this rule is that for a RAID configuration with a value of 0 or 1, the number of disks must be 2, hence why “Q out” is set to 2. With a value anywhere from 2 to 10, the number of disks must be 3, hence “Q out” is set to 3.
Therefore, under the Q fields, in the first field, Set “Q from” to “0,” “Q to” to “1” and “Q out” to “2.”
In the second field, set “Q from” to “2,” “Q to” to “10,” and “Q out” to “3.”
Please note, that although it is not displayed the value “0” for “Q from” has indeed been saved.
The rule can now be tested.
Click on the “Test” button found at the top. A test window opens.
Enter “1” in the “Test value” column for both the “$HasRAID” and “$RAID_Type” fields.
Click on the “Test” button.
In the table below the “test” button, the results appear.
The result for the “$NB_HDD” variable is 2.
Now change the test value for “$Raid_Type” to “5” and click on test again.
Notice the result is now “3” for the “$NB_HDD” variable.
Close the test window and then confirm to save the new rule.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q from
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q to
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
2
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
3
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the input in defined between 1 and 3, the output will be 2.
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
12
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the input is defined between 4 and 12, then the output will be 4.
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_Table_Rule_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Definition of a table rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

=== Optimal Selection ===
This very performing rule enables the automatic selection of the best alternative depending on the output quantity required and the related price. This rule is particularly appreciated in selecting products when one input corresponds to several possible output results.

Basically, the application will calculate all output as if they were "Single selection" rules and then compare all results based on the resulting price. With this result it will then chose the least expensive one as the output of the rule.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleOptimal.PNG‎|center|700x600px]]

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “Server Software 2.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “Optimal” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter a name for the rule, for example “determine best license package.”
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes. Select “Variables.”
In the list below, select “$NB_Licences.” Click on confirm.
Click on the add button near the “Q in” field. The same window from before opens, but it is only possible to select positions or variables. In this example a position is added.
In the description field, enter “cal” and then click on filter.
From the results, select the position “Windows Server 2008 CAL 1x” and then click on confirm.
Repeat the previous steps, but this time select “Windows Server 2008 CAL 5x” and click on confirm.
In “Q in” field for “Windows Server 2008 CAL 5x” set the value to “5.”
Click on the add button near “Q in” once again.
Repeat the previous steps and select the “Windows Server 2008 CAL 25x” position and click on confirm.
Enter “25” in the “Q in” field for “Windows Server 2008 CAL 25x”
The rule now states that based on the number of licences, various solutions are possible. When executed, the rule looks up the prices of the various outputs to determine the cheapest and most suitable option.
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.
The test window opens. Enter “10” in the “test value” cell and click on the “Test” button.
The results are shown below. Now enter “23” and click on “test.”
Close the test window. Click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
24 and 8
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1 and 1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the number of analogue ports needed is 30, the best configuration for the customer is to have 1 module with 24 ports and 1 with 8 ports.
If the number of analogue ports needed is 35, Metis will control which configuration would be the best for the customer between 1 x 24 + 2 x 8 and 2 x 24. The least expensive solution will be preferred and set as output.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1, 100 and 1000
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1 for each
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the number of licenses needed is 850, Metis will test the different possibilities and select the cheapest one:
* 8 x 100 + 50 x 1
* 9 x 100
* 1 x 1000
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_an_optimal_rule_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Definition of an optimal rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

=== Maximal Selection ===
This type of rule can be used when several input values influence a specific output. Each line will be used as a single criterion and Metis will return the highest result possible. It is particularly useful when the goal is to define a minimal number of one position in order to satisfy several criteria. When the input quantity is not within the indicated range (Q from – Q to), the line will not be valid, thus not considered by the rule.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleMaximal.PNG‎|center|700x600px]]

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “Server Software 1.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “Maximal” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter a name for the rule, for example “Determine number of MS licenses.”
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes.
Select “Variables.”
Select “$NB_Users” from the list and confirm.
Repeat the previous steps, but this time select the variable “$NB_Mailboxes” from the list and click on confirm.
Click on the add button near the “Output” field.
The same window from before opens, but it is only possible to select positions or variables.
Select “Variables.”
Select “$NB_Licences” from the list and confirm.
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.
The test window opens.
In the “test value” field for “$NB_Users” enter “25.” For “$NB_Mailboxes” enter “50.”
Click on the test button. The results appear below.
The purpose of the maximal rule is to output the maximum value found amongst several input values. This explains why the output value is “50” in this specific example.
Close the test window.
Click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
25 and 50
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
50
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
In this case the result is equal to the highest test value given.
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_maximal_rule_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Definition of a maximal rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

=== Minimal Selection ===
This type of rule uses the same logic as the Maximal Rule, but the lowest value will be returned as an output result.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “Server Software 1.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “Maximal” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter a name for the rule, for example “Determine number of MS licenses.”
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes.
Select “Variables.”
Select “$NB_Users” from the list and confirm.
Repeat the previous steps, but this time select the variable “$NB_Mailboxes” from the list and click on confirm.
Click on the add button near the “Output” field.
The same window from before opens, but it is only possible to select positions or variables.
Select “Variables.”
Select “$NB_Licences” from the list and confirm.
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.
The test window opens.
In the “test value” field for “$NB_Users” enter “25.” For “$NB_Mailboxes” enter “50.”
Click on the test button. The results appear below.
The purpose of the maximal rule is to output the maximum value found amongst several input values. This explains why the output value is “50” in this specific example.
Close the test window.
Click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
25 and 50
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
25
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
In this case the result is equal to the lowest test value given.
|-
|}

See Maximal Rule for example of how to use this type of rule.

=== Formulas ===
In some cases, the previous rules categories are not sufficient for a suitable result. The mathematical formula rules may be very helpful in calculating services associated to certain equipment.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleFormula.PNG‎|center|700x600px]]

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “Shipping.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “Formula” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter “Shipping.”
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes. Select “Attributes.”
Select “weight” and click on confirm.
Click on add again. Select “variables.” Search for the variable “$Shipping_Type.” Select it and click on confirm.
Click on the add button near the “Output” field. Search for the “shipping and handling” position. Select it and click on confirm.
In the “Quantity =” field, enter the following formula “(Var1*Var2)/2"
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.
The test window opens.
In the “test value” field for “weight” enter “12.” For “$Shipping_type” enter “3.”
Click on the test button. The results appear below. The formula is applied.
Note: The result of the formula is rounded if the result is not a whole number.
Close the test window.
Click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
13 and 2
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
18
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Based on the formula used in the example below :

''(Var1*Var2)/2''

The result with those input values is 18.
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_formula_based_rule_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Definition of a formula based rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

The main mathematical functions that may be used in rules are described in the table below:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Function
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Description
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Syntax
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Abs'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the absolute value of a numeric expression (integer or real).
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Abs(<Numeric>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real absolute value sought

<Numeric>: Numeric expression, integer or real numeric expression or numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Round'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the rounded value of a numeric value according to the specified number of decimal.
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Round(<Numeric Value> [,<Number of Decimals>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real rounded value of the specified numeric value.
<Numeric Value>: Real or currency numeric value to round. We recommend that you use the currency type in order to get reliable results.

'''Numeric Value'''
If <Numeric Value> is included between:

0 et 0.49: the number is rounded to 0. For example, 3.2 is rounded to 3 (no decimal).

0.5 and 0.99: the number is rounded to 1. For example, 3.7 is rounded to 4 (no decimal).
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsOdd'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an odd number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsOdd(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is odd, False otherwise.

<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsEven'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an even number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsEven(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is even, False otherwise.
<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number Integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Max'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the greatest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Max(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the greatest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Min'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the smallest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Min(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the smallest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''DecimalPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the decimal part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = DecimalPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IntegerPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the integer part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IntegerPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought. Corresponds to the largest integer smaller than or equal to <Number>.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Power'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Raises a number to a power
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Power(<Number to Raise>, <Exponent>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real result of the <Number to Raise> to the power of <Exponent>.

<Number to Raise>: Integer or real number to raise to the power.

<Exponent>: Integer or real exponent.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Root'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the root of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Root(<Number> [,<Root Factor>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real root of the number.

<Number>: Integer or real number to use.

<Root Factor>: Integer or real factor of the root (2 for a square root, 3 for a cubic root, ...). If this parameter is not specified, the square root of <Number> is returned.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Log'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the logarithm of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Log(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Ln'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the Napierian logarithm (reverse of exponential) of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Ln(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number??
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcSin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc sine of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcSin(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc sine (angle in degrees of the sine) of the specified numeric value, found in the [-90, 90] interval.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (sine) to use. This value must be found in the [-1,1] interval. Otherwise, an error occurs.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc tangent of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcTan(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc tangent (angle in degrees of the tangent) of the specified numeric value, included in the [-90,90] interval (excluding bounds).

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (tangent) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcCos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the arc cosine of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArCos(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>:

<Numeric Value>:
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Cos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cosine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Cos(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cosine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. This parameter can have any value: the cosine calculation is performed "modulo 360".
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''CoTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cotangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = CoTan(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cotangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 0°, 180° or -180°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Exp'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the exponential of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Exp(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real exponential sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Sin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle sine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Sin(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real sine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Tangent'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the angle tangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Tangent(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real tangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 90°, -90°, 270° or -270°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
???
|-
|}

=== External Selection===
For very complex rules, an external file might be used to implement them in Metis Smart Modeling. The purpose of this rule type is to allow the development of algorithms which may not be handled in Metis. The file linked to such rule should a compiled program which can be started by providing at least one parameter and which returns '''only one''' value. This file can be searched through the External File Name button on the right. In order for a new file to be displayed in that list it has to be "imported" through the ... .

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected.
On the left, in the “Groups of rules” dropdown list, select “D-Basic Hardware.”
Click on add. A window opens where the new rule will be created.
In the “Type” field, select “External” from the dropdown list. In the “comment” field, enter a name for the rule. For example, “Total Service Time.”
The goal of this example rule is to provide two inputs to an external program. The program will then sum up the value of the inputs and provide the output to a variable.
Click on the add button near the “input” field. A window opens where it is possible to select positions, variables, and attributes. Select “Attributes.”
Select “Installation time” from the list and confirm.
Repeat the same steps, but this time select “Project management” from the list.
Note: It is very important that the order in which the parameters are listed in the table is the same as within the external program.
Click on the add button near the “Output” field. The same window from before opens, but it is only possible to select positions or variables. In this example a position is added. Select “Variables.”
Search for the variable “$Service.” Select it and then confirm.
In the “Input” section, click on the icon next to the “External File Name” field.
A window opens. Click on the add button. The “select a file…” window opens.
For this example the file “ADD.exe” is added. Make sure that the “Add.exe” file is selected and then click on confirm to continue.
To test this new rule, click on the “test” button.The test window opens.
In the “test value” field for “Installation Time” enter “12.” For “Project Management,” enter “4.”
Click on the test button. The results appear below. The external program has summed up both input values.
Close the test window. Click on confirm to save the rule. It now appears in the list of rules.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
12 and 4
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
16
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Based on the external program used in the example below, which simply adds up to numbers :

''Var1+Var2''

The result with those input values is 16.
|-
|}

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/e/ec/VID_CreatingExternalRule.PNG'>File:Creating_an_External_Rule_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Definition of an external rule within Metis Smart Modeling.
}}

{{Note
| The external application which is executed when running an external rule can be written in any programming language as long as it is configured to accept one or more input variables and only one output. Common consideration for executing the application are not supported by Xpert Technologies SA.
}}

== Testing rules ==

All rules which have been created in Metis Smart Modeling can be tested in various ways, either on their own or as part of the group they belong. This section of the manual will focus on testing a rule by itself, for more information about other tests please refer to [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Check_Rules|Checking Rules]].

INPUT VALUES (Filter and input)
In the above table, value can be given to specific inputs for testing the current rule. The listed inputs include both the ones used as input for the rule and the ones used in the filter part of the rule. It goes without saying that in order to get a result from the test that all filters need to be valid.

OUTPUT VALUES (Output and Add-on)
In the lower table, results will be displayed based on the inputs given and the rule itself. The listed result include both the output defined in the rule and the "Add-on" specified.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Testing rules and groups of rules OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Testing rules and group of rules.
}}

{{Note
| Because optimal rule take into account the prices of the various possible results, the testing window allows to set which "Price category" should be used for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

{{Note
| Because some products may not be available for specific variants, the testing window allows to set a preferred "Variant" for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

== Structuring rules together ==
One simple example to described the importance of planning in advance the structure of the rules within a group or the groups themselves is in the scope of the configuration of a computer the calculation of the memory modules required. One way to accommodate this situation is to let the user input the requested amount of memory he would like to have configured in his machine.

The first rule will determine the number of 1 GB modules required to suit his needs. For example the input is 4 GB and the result is 4 modules of 1 GB each. The situation would be more complicated if the user had chosen 8 GB and that the machine could only hold 4 modules in total. This means that the model requires a second rule to check the number of 1 GB module against the number of slots available. In the example of a input equal to 8, the resulting number of modules is 8. The second rule could then take this value and modify the result to 2 GB modules thus making it possible to be installed on the machine.

Because in this situation the second needs to have the result of the first one available in order to use it has an input it is necessary that second be placed in another group of rules which should be executed after the one containing the first rule.

{{Note
| On the main rule screen, listing all rules within a single group, they can be sorted. This functionality is only a visual help for the user. Based on the execution scheme of models, sorting rule within a group doesn't have any effect on the result of the group. If rule need to be executed a sequential order, then they should be placed in sequential groups.
}}

== Advanced rules search ==
From the main rules screen in Metis Smart Modeling, the Advanced Search button brings up a window allowing to refine the search for rules.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRuleAdvSearch.PNG|center|850x860px]]

* '''ID'''
Search for a rule directly by entering its identification number.

* '''Comment'''
Search for a rule by entering the "Comment" (name) of a rule.

* '''Mandatory Control'''
Refine to search to rule which enforce mandatory controls.

* '''Contain Item'''
By using the ADD button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]] search for rules which contain a specific position, variable or attribute. Using the '''Used as''' options it is possible to refine how this object is used in the rule looked for. Either as a filter, an add-on value or as input or output values. In the case of objects being used in the rule itself, the application allows to specify exactly where it is used in the rule.

** ''Rule Input or Output'' : Object used either as an input or an output of a rule.
** ''Rule Input only'' : Object used only as an input of a rule.
** ''Rule Output only'' : Object used only as an output of a rule.
** ''Not used as Input or Output'' : Object used neither as an input nor an output of a rule.

By clicking on the "search" button, the search is executed and the results (if any) is displayed in the table on the right of the window. Double-clicking on a listed rule will open it and allow for modifications and testing.

{{Note
| The comment field doesn't enforce capitalization.
}}

== Modifying a rule ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected. On the left, in the “Groups of rules” drop-down list, select the appropriate group where the rule to be edited is stored. Select the rule and click on the EDIT button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]], the rule definition window opens up and modifications can be applied. Validation is required in order to save all changes made to the rule. Please refer to the individual rule type description for additional information on configuring a valid rule.

{{Note
| If modifications are applied to a rule which is used in several groups, keep in mind that changes will be have an influence on all groups or models in which this rule is used. It may be relevant to make a copy of the rule in order to test the modifications.
}}

=== Duplicating a rule ===

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected. On the left, in the “Groups of rules” drop-down list, select the appropriate group where the rule to be duplicated is stored. Select the rule and click on the DUPLICATE button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDuplicateButton.PNG|link=]], the rule is immediately copied and placed in the selected group of rules. It is an exact copy, or duplicate, of the original one. It can then be edited to fit all requirements or moved to another group.

{{Note
| A duplicated rule is an entirely new rule. All modifications applied to the original or the duplicate will not be reciprocated to the other one.
}}

=== Moving a rule to another group of rules===

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected. On the left, in the “Groups of rules” drop-down list, select the appropriate group where the rule to be moved is stored. Select the rule and click on the MOVE button [[File:MetisSmartModelingMoveButton.PNG|link=]], a new window opens where the target group of rule can be selected from the complete list of groups available in Metis Smart Modeling. Once the group of rules selected, validation is required in order to save all changes made to the rule.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRulesMove.PNG‎|center|300x500px|link=]]

{{Note
| Moving a rule doesn't create a copy of it, neither an additional link. It really moves it from one group of rules to another.
}}

=== linking a rule with another group of rules===

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected. On the left, in the “Groups of rules” drop-down list, select the appropriate group where the rule to be linked to other group(s) of rule is located. Select the rule and click on the LINK button [[File:MetisSmartModelingLinkButton.PNG|link=]], a window opens up where a target group of rules can be selected from a drop-down list to set the group of rules where the selected rule should be applied. Once selected, validation is required in order to save all changes made to the rule.

{{Note
| Linking a rule to more than one group of rules, doesn't copy the rule inside that group. It is still identified through one ID.
}}

{{Note
| Changes applied to one occurrence of a rule linked in several groups will have an impact on all those groups.
}}

To check in which groups of rules a rule is used (linked), select the rule for which a verification should be done and click on the "Currently used by" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingCurrentlyUsedByButton.PNG|link=]]. A window will open displaying all groups of rules, models and systems to which the selected rule is linked. Please refer here for more information.

== Deleting a rule ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure that the “Rules” sub-menu has been selected. On the left, in the “Groups of rules” drop-down list, select the appropriate group where the rule to be edited is stored. Select the rule and click on the DELETE button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected rule. Once confirmed it will be definitively deleted from the selected group of rules.

{{Note
| When the same rule is used in more then one group of rules, Metis Smart Modeling will open a window showing a list of all groups in which the rule is linked. It is then possible to either delete the rule form all groups or select the group form which it should be deleted.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRulesDel.PNG‎|center|300x500px|link=]]

}}

{{Warning
| Extra care should be taken when deleting a rule which produces an output which will afterwards be used as an input for another rule in a group of rules following the current one. This will result in wrong results at the end of the execution scheme.
}}

Description of the Sub-Menu Group of Rules

2011-12-19T08:10:58Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Group of Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Group of Rules

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Group of Rules]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Group of Rules

2011-12-19T08:10:58Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Group of Rules to Metis Smart Modeling - Group of Rules

In the Metis environment a Group of Rules is a container for rules. Those containers are also the main building block of a model. As described in this section, it is based on those Group of Rules that Models can sequentially execute rules and the full logic behind them. From a more technical point if view, Group of Rules are made of a name and the rules it contains.

== Creating a new group of rules ==

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Groups of Rules” sub-menu. here the application displays a list of all defined Group of Rules.
Click on “Add" [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
The “Group Rules” window opens.
Name the group of rules. For example, “S-Basic Hardware.”
Click on confirm to save the changes.
The newly created group of rules is now displayed in the list and can be edited.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCGroupOfRules.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

A group of rules only "lives" when it includes rules, please refer to this [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Rules|section]] to created new rules in a Group of Rules.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:CreatingAGroupOfRules OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and edition of a group of rules.
}}

{{Tip
| A well studied group of rules structure will lower the amount of tests required and enhance the efficiency of the overall model they will be used in.
}}

== Using a group of rules in models ==

In order for a fully configured Group of Rules (named and containing rules) to be executed it needs to be part of a model. This task is done on the model level. Either when creating one or when modifying it, Group of rules can be added to one or more models. Please refer to [[Description_of_Sub-Menu_Models#Creating_a_new_model|this section]] for additional information how to do this.

A particular group of rules may be used by several different models, thus by several different systems. Changes made to a group(new, deleted or edited rule...) will be effective for every model or systems employing the same group of rules.

In order to verify the use of a Group of rules, Metis delivers an easy to use functionality. In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Groups of Rules” sub-menu. Select a group of rules and click on the "Currently used by" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingCurrentlyUsedByButton.PNG|link=]] to have an overview of the use of the group of rules. A new window opens up which displays the list of models in which the Group of Rules is used. On the right-hand side, it also displays the names of the Systems in which the Group of Rules, through the model it is linked to, is used. No edition or modifications can be done in this windows. Use the validation button the close the window.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCGroupOfRules2.PNG|center|850x860px]]

== Testing and modifying a group of rules ==

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Groups of Rules” sub-menu. Select the group of rules which needs to be modified. Click on “Edit" [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The “Group Rules” window opens. Please refer to the section above for information about all different parts. Changes will be stored only when the window is validated. To do this, click on the confirmation button.

Existing Group of rules can also be duplicated in order to make copies of it. By clicking the "Duplicate" button Metis Smart modeling will create an exact copy of the selected group of rules. The copy will also include all Rules which have been created inside of the original group of rules. Once the duplicate appears in the list it can be edited by using the "Edit" button.

{{Note
| Because optimal rule take into account the prices of the various possible results, the testing window allows to set which "Price category" should be used for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

{{Note
| Because some products may not be available for specific variants, the testing window allows to set a preferred "Variant" for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

As described [[Description_of_Sub-Menu_Rules#Testing_a_Rule|here]] individual Rules can be tested from their definition window. The group of rules sub-menu allows the user to test a whole Group of Rules at once. By clicking on the " Test" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingTestButton.PNG|link=]], a similar windows to the one displayed when testing a rule opens up. The main difference with the latest is that here the input table will display input set throughourt all the rules which are included in the group. Moreover, it will also display all outputs which will be produced by the rules in the table at the bottom.

To test a Group of rules, insert values for all inputs listed in the above table and click on the "test" button. Metis will the execute all the rules which are included in the group and display the obtained results in the lower table.

As for individual rules, the execution of a group of rules may be influenced by external elements. For example in group of rules which include one or more optimal rules the output may be different based the price category used. On the top part of the windows, the two main influential elements can be set, variants and price categories.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCGroupOfRules3.PNG|center|850x860px]]

To close the current window, use the validation button.

{{Tip
| Test rules and group of rules with real data for a more efficient debug process.
}}

Please refer to the following [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Rules#Testing_rules|section]] for a video about testing rules and group of rules.

== Deleting a group of rules ==

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Groups of Rules” sub-menu. Select the group of rules which needs to be deleted.
Click on “Delete" [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]].
This opens a small window requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected Group of Rules. Once confirmed it will be definitively be deleted along with all the rules included in it.

{{Note
| Only rules which only exist in the selected group of rules will be deleted. If they occur in other groups they will still exist there.
}}

Description of the Sub-Menu Masks

2011-12-19T08:10:31Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Masks to Metis Smart Modeling - Masks

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Masks]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Masks

2011-12-19T08:10:31Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Masks to Metis Smart Modeling - Masks

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

== What is a mask? ==

In Metis Smart Modeling, masks are one of the building blocks of the modelisation. Masks are defined in terms of layout and functionnalities in Metis Smart Modeling and are then used in Metis Smart Quote for the users to define input values which will be then be used by the models (logical part) to generate positions in an offer.

Masks are defined in Metis Smart Modeling under the masks sub-menu.

{{Note
| Throughout this section, an example will be used as a base for presenting all the function linked to the creation of a mask. Though it will be quite simple, it will cover all different type of objects and functionalities which can be used in this part of Metis Smart Modeling. As masks are used only in conjunction with models, the example will also make links to the creation of the underlying model.
}}

== How is it used? ==
Masks are the building blocks of a model which allow users to input value in order to influence the result of the models calculation (rules). This element can be used in the "material" and "service" models and will be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes under the "Design" section of an offer. They will allow the Metis Smart Quotes user to easily configure the selected system.

Link to Metis Smart Quote

== Consideration linked to using and defining masks ==
When planning the design of a mask, or simply creating one, it is very important to consider the equipment used in throughout the organization. The most relevant aspect is the screen size of the machine used. Each screen has its own maximum resolution. For example, the sizes most commonly found nowadays are either 1280 x 800 or 1378 x 768. This means that the average width of the screens is around 1300. This should be taken into account when defining the width of the mask. It doesn't means that the designer building the masks will have to make calculation to check whether the mask will fit on the most common screens but that he should pay attention its own screen size, so that if his is above average, he keeps in mind that his users will have smaller screens.

Another aspect to the size of a masks is its length. Metis allows for the designer of a mask to make it about as tall as he wants. This is very useful when the information related to a set of parameter should not be split into several masks. But Metis also enable the creation of group of masks which have as a main goal to provide the designer with the possibility to created sets of masks related to a similar "subject" and structure them into tabs. Thus it is relevant to think about the size of one mask before designing it, as it could be a long one or one which is split into tabs.

{{Tip
| Instead of creating huge unworkable masks, please prefer creating multiple masks and placing them in a group of masks.
}}

== Creating a mask ==

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Masks” sub-menu.
Click on “Add" [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
This opens a window asking which type of mask to create, a selection can done between a "simple" mask and a Group of masks. Select “Mask,” and confirm.
A mask designer window opens and the first settings can be provided.
A pop-up window also opens in which the name of the mask must be defined.
Enter in a name for the new mask; for example, name it “S-Basic Properties.”
Note: The mask is purposely left empty. Designing a mask is shown in other videos.
Confirm to save the new mask.
The new mask is shown in the list.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_mask_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Creating and setting up basic properties for a mask.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Title'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Name
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the name for the mask. It will be displayed in the Metis Smart Modeling mask list and in Metis Smart Quotes.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Description
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set a short description for the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | HelpFile
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Define the link to a help file which will support the mask.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderBrush
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the color of the border of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderThickness
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the "width" of the border of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the background color of the mask.
|-
|}

=== Editor presentation ===
Metis Smart Modeling includes a complete WYSIWYG editor in order to create and design the masks which are going to be used in Metis Smart Quote. This editor includes all commonly used tools and formatting option which can be found in user interface design tools. It is structured as described in the picture on the right. It includes the following parts :

# '''Object list''' : lists in a structured and order way all the elements of the current mask
# '''Property table''' : list of all object specific properties
# '''Toolbar''' : set of tools available to design and edit the layout of a mask
# '''Design area''' : drawing-board to design the mask

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCMasksDesign.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

==== List of objects ====
The list of object displayed in the mask design window enable the user to easily find a specific object part of the opened mask. When inserting any type of object in a mask, it is possible to name this field. In the list of objects a new line is created for the new object. By clicking in the "description" column of the table, a name can be given to the object. By doing this for all objects, the user will by able to easily select overlapping objects.

The selection of an object from the list is done by enabling the check-box on the left hand side of the line describing the object. This will also highlight he object on the design board. This ensure the user that the proper object is selected in order to apply modifications or to delete it.

For mask with many input fields, it is possible to define the order in which the users will go through them using the order shown in the list of objects. This will not only set the navigation order when using the keyboard TAB key, but also the display order of for overlaying the object. If not set, the object reversed insertion order will be applied (last one first). In order to move an object in the list, select it and use the up and down pointing arrows on the right of the object list.

{{Tip
| Naming all objects in a mask will ease sorting them and applying conditional display.
}}

==== Object properties ====

* '''Properties''' :

Common TAB to all objects which can be used in masks created in Metis Smart Modeling. Please refer to the various object type sections for detailed information on the properties which can be configured.

* '''Activation''' :

For all objects an activation rule can be defined in order for the object to enabled or disabled based on the setting of another object. This functionality is simply used by selecting "Like object" and selecting the correct object from the drop-down list. For example if an input field is disabled based on a specific setting, the accompanying title field should also be disabled. Thus the latest can inherit the disabled setting from the first one.

* '''Caption''' :
For objects like 'titles' and 'check-boxes', this TAB allows to set the caption (text) to be displayed in the object. In order to set this text, click on the text button next to the field and a new windows will open. It allows to provide a text in all available languages and will display it in the mask in Metis Smart Quotes.

* '''Link''' :
With the exception of the 'title' object, all other will return a value to the model. The Link TAB allows to define the position or variable in which that value will be set. In order to create a link between a field and a variable or position, simply click on the 'Add' button and select the appropriate target from the window which will be opened. Filtering and searches can be done inside this window in order o find easily the wished variable or position.

* '''Content''' :

This allows to specify the content (list of elements) for 'drop-down list' and 'radio buttons'. When inserted, those objects have by default 2 options defined. Additional options can be added to the list by using the 'Add' button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]] and defining the text to be displayed. Once the option is added, simply click on the text button in the rightmost column of the table in the appropriate line. A windows opens which allows to provide a text in all available languages and will display it in the mask in Metis Smart Quotes. On the other hand, options can be removed using the minus button (beware, no confirmation will be required).

The various options can also be sorted manually according to any criteria required by the type of data to be displayed in the "list". This is very easily done by selecting the option to be moved and by using the tow green arrows.

==== Toolbar ====

The following table describes the buttons are to be used in order to work with a mask, manage events and format, add new objects and align them:

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingOKButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To save the edits that may have been made and exit
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingCancelButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To cancel the edits that may have been made and exit
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingBinButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To delete the selected object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingUndoButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To undo the last event in the design frame
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingRedoButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To redo the last undone event
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatCopyButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To copy the formatting properties to another object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatTitleButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Inserting_titles_and_texts|Title]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatInputFieldButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert an [[#Input_fields|Input field]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatDropdownButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Drop-down_lists|Drop-down list]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatCheckboxButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Check-boxes|Check-box]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatRadioButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Radio_Buttons|Radio Button]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatGaugeButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Sliders|Slider]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatPictureButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Pictures|Picture]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatTectangleButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Rectangles|Rectangle]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatCircleButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Circles|Circle]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatLineButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To insert a [[#Lines|Line]] object
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatAlignTopButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To align all selected objects to the topmost one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatAlignBottomButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To align all selected objects to the bottommost one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatAlignLeftButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To align all selected objects to the leftmost one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatAlignRightButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To align all selected objects to the rightmost one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatSetWidthButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To set an identical width to the selected objects as the first one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatSetHeightButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To set an identical height to the selected objects as the first one.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatSpaceHorizButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To set an identical horizontal space between all selected objects.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatSpaceVertButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | To set an identical vertical space between all selected objects.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | [[File:MetisSmartModelingDisplayConditionButton.PNG|link=]]
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | To define "display" rule between objects.
|-
|}

==== Design frame ====
Each object placed on the drawing-board can be moved by selecting it and moving the mouse while holding the left mouse button pressed, as show in the various videos. When selected, each object can also be re-sized and transformed by using the 8 handles which surround it. The ones in the corners can be used to change the size of the object in two directions at the same time, while the ones on the sides only modify one dimension.

Additionally to using the mouse to move the object, the arrow keys on the computer keyboard move the object in the direction of the pressed button. This is particularly useful when aligning objects or requiring a very precise shifting of an object.

The two sliding bars (left and bottom) can be used to move around in the mask. They also show the user the maximum size of a mask. Please refer the section above for best practices on sizing a mask.

=== Designing a mask ===
The various tools available in the toolbar allow not only to define input fields of different type, but also to set up the overall visual look of the masks. The use of geometric shapes to create cells, or lines to connect parts of a mask are only a couple of things which can be done with those tools. And do not forget the insertion of pictures in order to create eye-catching masks which the user will find not only easy to use but also pleasant to navigate.

In order to align different object in a mask, Metis Smart Modeling offers a selection of alignment tools which include the most commonly used ones applying to most situations. For example, use the following button ( [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatSetWidthButton.PNG|link=]] ) to set all select input fields and drop-down lists to have the same horizontal size. Use this one ( [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatAlignRightButton.PNG|link=]] ) to align them to the right of the first one which was selected.

{{Note
| All object which can be inserted in a mask don't have the same borders. This means that aligning an input field with a title may require some manual work.
}}

==== Pictures ====
In the mask editor window, click on the “picture” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatPictureButton.PNG|link=]] in the toolbar.
A picture graphic appears on the screen.
The graphic can be re-sized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners. It can also be moved anywhere on the design board by dragging and dropping it.
To define the actual picture, select the graphic and move to the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
Click on the [[File:MetisSmartModelingEdit2Button.PNG|link=]]‎ icon in the “source” field.
A window opens containing some images that were previously uploaded in the “Data Management” menu.
Select a picture and double-click it to add it.
The position, the size and the style of the picture can be edited from the properties section.
To modify the picture’s position, for example, set “X1” and “Y1” to 10.
Set the “width” and “height” to 220 to modify its dimensions.
Under “Style” in the field “Stretch,” select “uniform.”
The final step is to activate the graphic using the “Activation” tab.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Inserting_a_picture_in_a_mask_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Inserting a picture in a mask and working with its properties.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Stretch
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | ''Centered'' - Image is centered in the inserted field, but it is not re-sized to the field.

''Fill'' - The image is stretched to take up the while space defined by the field.

''Uniform'' - The image is re-sized to match the smallest dimension of the field (X or Y). The image is then fully displayed.

''UniformToFill'' - The image is stretch to fill the longest dimension of the field (X or Y).
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Source
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | This property allows to set the image to be inserted in the field. The list of available images in definable through the functionality available in the "Data Management" section of QSM. Refer to this section in order to import new images in QSM.
|-
|}

{{Note
| With the "Fill", "Uniform" and "UnifromToFill" settings, the image is automatically re-sized when modifying the field on the design board.
}}

{{Tip
| Use pictures in masks in order to better illustrate the data requested in order to configure a specific system or model.
}}

==== Rectangles ====
In the mask editor window, click on the blue rectangle icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatTectangleButton.PNG|link=]] in the toolbar.
A rectangle graphic appears on the screen.
The graphic can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
The graphic can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
For example, set “X1” and “Y1” to 10 to modify its position.
The graphic moves to the position specified.
To deselect the graphic, click on the design board around it.
Another way to deselect the graphic is to find it under the shape menu on the left and untick the box.
Note: The properties section is no longer available once the graphic has been deselected.
The graphic can be reselected simply by clicking on it or by ticking the corresponding box under shape.
Now the properties can once again be modified.
Set the width and the height to “100” for example.
The graphic is resized as specified.
The other properties are just as easily modified. For example, the radius is set to “0,” the background is changed to “yellow,” the border brush is changed to “orange” and the border thickness is changed to 10.
The final step is to activate the graphic using the “Activation” tab.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Inserting_a_rectangle_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Inserting a rectangle in a mask and working with its properties.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Radius
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Define the radius of the rounded angle of the rectangle.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the background color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderBrush
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the color of the border of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | BorderThickness
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the "width" of the border of the object.
|-
|}

{{Tip
| Rectangles can be use in masks design in order to visually group related input fields together.
}}

==== Circles ====
In the mask editor window, click on the blue circle icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatCircleButton.PNG|link=]] in the toolbar.
A circle graphic appears on the screen.
The graphic can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
The graphic can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
For example, set “X1” and “Y1” to 10 to modify its position.
The graphic moves to the position specified.
To deselect the graphic, click on the design board around it.
Another way to deselect the graphic is to find it under the shape menu on the left and untick the box.
Note: The properties section is no longer available once the graphic has been deselected.
The graphic can be reselected simply by clicking on it or by ticking the corresponding box under shape.
Now the properties can once again be modified.
Set the width and the height to “100” for example.
The graphic is resized as specified.
The other properties are just as easily modified. For example, the radius is set to “0,” the background is changed to “yellow,” the border brush is changed to “orange” and the border thickness is changed to 10.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Limits and default configurations of all the systems included in the group will be used when executing the group in Metis Smart Quote.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the background color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderBrush
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the color of the border of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | BorderThickness
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the "width" of the border of the object.
|-
|}

==== Lines ====
In the mask editor window, click on the "line" icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatLineButton.PNG|link=]] in the toolbar. A line graphic appears on the screen. The graphic can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides. It can be moved anywhere on the design board. The graphic can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side. For example, set “X1” and “Y1” to 10 to modify its position. The graphic moves to the position specified. To deselect the graphic, click on the design board around it. Another way to deselect the graphic is to find it under the shape menu on the left and untick the box. Note: The properties section is no longer available once the graphic has been deselected. The graphic can be reselected simply by clicking on it or by ticking the corresponding box under shape. Now the properties can once again be modified. Set "X2" and "Y2" to “100” for example. The line has now a 45 degree angle. The other properties are just as easily modified. For example, the border brush is changed to “pink” and the border thickness is changed to 10.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Inserting a line in a mask and working with its properties.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderBrush
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the color of the border of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | BorderThickness
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the "width" of the border of the object, in this case the "width" of the line.
|-
|}

{{Note
| From the properties table, when selecting a background or a border color, a pop window is displayed which shows a set of basic colors which can be applied. In the lower part of this window to buttons allow to browse through additional colors. The first ones shows the full color spectrum and allows to pinpoint the one required. The second one lists colors which are commonly used with their name.
}}

{{Tip
| Circles in masks can also be used to visually link input fields or related section of a mask together.
}}

=== Inserting titles and texts ===
To insert a text field in the mask editor, click on the “text” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatTitleButton.PNG|link=]] found in the toolbar.
A graphic with the word “title” appears on the design board.
This graphic can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
The graphic can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
For example, set “X1” and “Y1” to 10 to modify its position.
The graphic moves to the position specified.
To resize the width and the height, use the width and height fields. For example, set the width to 120 and the height to 50.
To change the font type, use the family field. For example, set the font to Arial.
One can also change the size, the style and the weight of the text. For example, the size is set to “16”, the style to “Italic”, and the weight to “bold”.
Under the style section, the text alignment is set to “Center” and the color of the text to “Fuschia.”
In the “Caption” tab, click on the edit icon.
This opens a new window where the graphic can be renamed for all the available languages.
For example, change “Title” to “Input Value.” Click on confirm to continue.
The text is now updated.
The other properties are just as easily modified. See below for a complete list.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Inserting and setting up a text field in a mask.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Font'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Family
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font family to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Size
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font size to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Style
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font style to be used for the object. Available styles are : Italic, Normal (default) and Oblic.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Weight
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font weight to be used for the object. Available weights are : Bold, Normal (default) and UltraBold.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Text Alignment
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the alignment for the text inside of the object. Available alignments are : Left (default), center and right
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Foreground
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the text color of the object.
|-
|}

=== Setting up input fields ===
===== Input fields =====
To insert a text field in the mask editor, click on the “input field” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatInputFieldButton.PNG|link=]] found in the toolbar. An "input field" appears on the design board.
It can be edited just like the “text” field from above.
For example, X1 is set to 130 and Y1 to 10.
Now click on the “Link” tab. A link is made to an entry in order for Metis to use the inputted field value in a model.
Click on the “Add” button. This opens a new window where the user can link the graphic to a position or a variable.
For example, select “variables.” Search for a position, for example, "$Memory" is selected from the list. Click on confirm to continue.
We now see “$Memory” in the Link tab.
Note: Only one link can be defined per object.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Inserting and setting up an input field in a mask.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Font'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Family
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font family to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Size
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font size to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Weight
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font weight to be used for the object. Available weights are : Bold, Normal (default) and UltraBold.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Horizontal Alignment
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the alignment for the text inside of the field. Available alignments are : Left, center and right (default)
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Vertical Alignment
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the alignment for the text inside of the field. Available alignments are : Top (default), center and bottom
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the background color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Foreground
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the text color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | BorderBrush
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the border color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | BorderThickness
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the "width" of the object's border.
|-
|}

{{Warning
| Input fields can only be used to display enter input numerical values, as text cannot be used as input or output for rules.
}}

===== Drop-down lists =====
To insert a text field in the mask editor, click on the “drop-down list” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatDropdownButton.PNG|link=]] found in the toolbar.
This adds a “drop down list” object on the design board.
This object can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
The graphic can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
To reposition the drop down list, use the X1 and Y1 fields.
For example, set X1 to 130 and Y1 to 40.
Now move to the “Content” tab.
Click on the edit icon for the “Option 1” field found on the right.
This opens a new window where the “Option 1” entry can be renamed for all the available languages.
For example, rename it to “2 GB.”
Once the entry has been appropriately renamed, confirm.
Repeat the previous steps for the “Option 2” entry. Rename it “4 GB.”
To add another entry, simply click on the “Add” button.
Repeat the previous steps to rename the “Option 3” entry to “8 GB.”
The “Up” and “Down” arrows found on the “Content” tab allow the user to sort the entries as desired.
Next, a value needs to be set according to each of the entries. For example, the three entries values are set to 2, 4, and 8 respectively.
Now click on the “Link” tab. A link is made to an entry in order for Metis to use the inputted field value in a model.
Click on the “Add” button. This opens a new window where the user can link the graphic to a position or a variable.
Search for a position.
For example, enter “DDR” in the “Description” field and launch the search.
Select a position from the matching results.
For example, “DDR2 1GB.”
The position is now linked with the graphic.
Note: Only one link can be defined per object.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Inserting_a_dropdown_list_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Inserting and setting-up a drop-down list in a mask.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Font'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Family
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font family to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Size
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font size to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Style
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font style to be used for the object. Available styles are : Italic, Normal (default) and Oblic.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Weight
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font weight to be used for the object. Available weights are : Bold, Normal (default) and UltraBold.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Horizontal Alignment
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the alignment for the text inside of the field. Available alignments are : Left, center and right (default)
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Vertical Alignment
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the alignment for the text inside of the field. Available alignments are : Top (default), center and bottom
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the background color of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Foreground
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the text color of the object.
|-
|}

===== Check-boxes =====
To insert a text field in the mask editor, click on the “check-box” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatCheckboxButton.PNG|link=]] found in the toolbar.
A “check-box” object appears on the design board.
The object can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
To deselect the object, click on the design board around it.
Another way to deselect is to find it under the control menu on the left and untick the box.
Notice that when the graphic has been deselected, the properties tab is empty.
The object can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
For example, set “X1” to 220 and “Y1” to 40 to modify its position.
The object moves to the position specified.
In the “Caption” tab, click on the edit icon.
This opens a new window where the graphic can be renamed for all the available languages.
For example, rename it “Available size,” then click on confirm to continue.
The text is now updated.
Now click on the “Link” tab. A link is made to an entry in order for Metis to use the inputted field value in a model.
Click on the “Add” button. This opens a new window where the user can link the graphic to a position or a variable.
For example, select “variables.” Search for a position, for example, “$SelectChoice.”
Select it and confirm.
We now see “$SelectChoice” in the Link tab.
Note: Only one link can be defined per graphic.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Inserting_a_checkbox_in_a_mask_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Inserting and setting-up a check-box in a mask.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Font'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Family
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font family to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Size
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font size to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Style
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font style to be used for the object. Available styles are : Italic, Normal (default) and Oblic.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Weight
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font weight to be used for the object. Available weights are : Bold, Normal (default) and UltraBold.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Foreground
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the text color of the object.
|-
|}

{{Note
| Values returned by a checkbox field can only be "0" and "1", as the checkbox is a boolean field.
}}

===== Radio Buttons =====
In the mask editor window, click on the “radio button” icon [[File:MetisSmartModelingFromatRadioButton.PNG|link=]] in the toolbar.
This adds a “radio button” object on the design board.
This object can be resized by clicking and holding on the sides or corners.
It can be moved anywhere on the design board.
The object can also be edited using the properties section at the lower left-hand side.
To reposition the drop down list, use the X1 and Y1 fields.
For example, set X1 to 130 and Y1 to 40.
Now move to the “Content” tab.
Click on the edit icon for the “Option 1” field found on the right.
This opens a new window where the “Option 1” entry can be renamed for all the available languages.
For example, rename it to “2 GB.”
Once the entry has been appropriately renamed, confirm.
Repeat the previous steps for the “Option 2” entry. Rename it “4 GB.”
To add another entry, simply click on the “Add” button.
Repeat the previous steps to rename the “Option 3” entry to “8 GB.”
The “Up” and “Down” arrows found on the “Content” tab allow the user to sort the entries as desired.
Next, a value needs to be set according to each of the entries. For example, the three entries values are set to 2, 4, and 8 respectively.
Now click on the “Link” tab. A link is made to an entry in order for Metis to use the inputted field value in a model.
Click on the “Add” button. This opens a new window where the user can link the graphic to a position or a variable.
Search for a position.
For example, enter “DDR” in the “Description” field and launch the search.
Select a position from the matching results.
For example, “DDR2 1GB.”
The position is now linked with the graphic.
Note: Only one link can be defined per graphic.
The final step is to activate the graphic using the “Activation” tab.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Inserting_a_radio_button_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Limits and default configurations of all the systems included in the group will be used when executing the group in Metis Smart Quote.
}}

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Location and size'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | X1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the horizontal position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Y1
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the vertical position of the object relatively to the upper-left corner of the mask.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Width
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the width of the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Height
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the height of the object.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Font'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Family
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font family to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Size
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font size to be used for the object.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Style
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font style to be used for the object. Available styles are : Italic, Normal (default) and Oblic.
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Weight
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Set the font weight to be used for the object. Available weights are : Bold, Normal (default) and UltraBold.
|-
|colspan="2" style="background: #c8dcb4; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Style'''
|-
|style="width:100px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | Background
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | Set the background color of the object.
|-
|}

===== Sliders =====
Coming soon.

=== Applying conditional display to objects ===
Metis Smart Modeling, through its mask definition functionnalities, allows to define dynamic layout changes inside those masks. In specific cases, not all fields defined in a mask should be displayed at once. a drop-down list could be conditional to the selection of an option. This allows to base the display or activation of fields on user input.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCMasksConditionnal2.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

A combination of several display rules can be defined in order to setup masks which modify themselves dynamically upon user input. The screen capture above shows 5 rules which work on only a handful of fields but which allow to gray and hide them as the user modifies his selections within the mask.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCMasksConditionnal3.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

Defining a conditional display rule is done from the dedicated window which is based on three main parts.

1. '''Basic information'''
* '''Comment''' (mandatory)
A description for the display rule, usually a name to identify the rule within the list.
* '''ID''' (automatic)
Internal identification number for the current rule.
* '''State'''
State to be set for the selected fields if the condition defined within the rule is valid.

2. '''Condition table'''

List of all conditions which will be applied to the current display rule.

3. '''Object list'''

List of objects within the mask on which the current rule will have influence and the selected state based on the condition.

To applied conditions on object proceed as follows:

Click on the conditional display button.
A window opens with a list of rules which apply to current fields in the mask.
To create a new rule, click on the “Add” button.
The rule window opens.
In the comment field, name the rule. For example: “Router List.”
Under the State section for the rule, select “Grayed.”
For the condition table, click on the “add” button.
The conditions selection window opens.
It is possible to select positions, variables and attributes.
Choose variables. Select a variable from the list and confirm to continue.
Under the condition column, select “=.” For the value column, enter “0.”
Select an object for which the condition will be applied to. For example: the drop-down list named “Router List.”
Confirm to save the new rule and continue.
The rule now appears in the list below.
Confirm to return to the mask designer window.
Now this new display rule can be tested in Metis Smart Quotes.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Activation Rule OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Defining conditional display rules and applying them to an existing mask.
}}

{{Note
| All display rules defined within a mask should be taken into account when defining the calculation rules to be executed within the model link to the mask. For example, if a check-box hides a list of options, the rules which will use the value selected in the list should first test if the check-box has been validated.
}}

{{Warning
| Special care should be taken when defining several display rules working on the same fields, as incoherent results may be shown in the mask when previewed or used in Metis Smart Quotes. It is recommended to thoroughly test all display rules.
}}

=== Deleting objects ===
All objects which have been created and inserted into a mask can be easily deleted using the "Delete" key on the keyboard. First select the object, either on the drawing-board or form the object list, then hit the key on the computer. No confirmation will be inquired by the application. As all editing is only saved when the design has been confirmed, using the cancel button [[File:MetisSmartModelingCancelButton.PNG|link=]] from the toolbar will delete all changes done since the mask was opened in the editor. In order to prevent any misuse of the button, Metis Smart Modeling will ask the user to confirm the cancellation.

{{Warning
| If objects have been deleted and the changes validated, the "undo" function will not restore the objects. The scope of the function is limited to the time spent inside the mask editor; every validation or cancellation will result in losing the action log enabling the function.
}}

=== Validating changes ===
Masks created using the design tool, or the ones being changed are not saved automatically. In order store all changes in the Metis database, the design has to validate either the mask created or the changes done to an existing mask. This is done simply by using the validation button [[File:MetisSmartModelingOKButton.PNG|link=]] from the toolbar. In order to cancel all changes or cancel the creation of a new mask, the designer can click on the cancel button [[File:MetisSmartModelingCancelButton.PNG|link=]] from the toolbar.

=== Undo /Redo ===
History and normal use of the function

== Deleting a mask ==

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Masks” sub-menu. Select the Mask. Click on the "Delete" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected mask. Once confirmed it will be definitively deleted and a model might not have any mask anymore. If this is the case, the model may not work anymore.

{{Warning
| Extra care should be taken when deleting masks from Metis Smart Modeling, as entire models may be depending on it. Please verify the use of a mask before deleting it.
}}

{{Tip
| Consider deactivating a mask instead of deleting it in the first time, as information it contains could be used elsewhere.
}}

== Modifying a mask ==
In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Mask” sub-menu. Select the mask to be modified from the list. Click on the "Edit" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The mask editor window opens up with the selected mask displayed in the design board. Please refer to the section above for information about editing a mask and using the available opbjects. Changes will be stored only when the window is validated. To do this, click on the confirmation button [[File:MetisSmartModelingOKButton.PNG|link=]].

TO ADD : working in a team

== Working with Groups of masks ==
A group of masks is a set of masks which could be related to the same subject, but which are presented in Metis Smart Quote under tabs which can be defined in Metis Smart Quote. The whole principle of group of masks is to setup this layout. Metis Smart Modelling allows to define the name and the content of the group, basically a group is an entity which then links to different masks, which will then make up the group. Each masks linked to the group is then named in order to setup the tabs. And define the definitive layout in Metis Smart Quote.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModelsGroups.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

In the “Modeling” menu, make sure to select the “Masks” sub-menu. Click on “Add" . This opens a window asking which type of mask to create, a selection can done between a "simple" mask and a Group of masks. Select “Group of Masks,” and confirm. A window opens which allows to define the new group of masks and its properties. Enter a name for the new group of masks; for example, name it “Desktop (Group)”. In the bottom table, all the masks to be included in the group can be selected and a display name can be given to all of them. Confirm to save the new mask. The new mask is shown in the list.

* '''Name''' (mandatory)
A name for the group of masks must be given.
* '''Comment'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.
* '''Description'''
A description for the group of masks, usually a name, can be added in all of the active languages.
* '''Help file'''
A file with information about the masks contained in the group and the model can be linked to the group of masks. An icon will be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes in order for the user to view the file within the application.

Defining the tabs displayed in Metis Smart Quotes is done by linking masks to the group. For each tab displayed at the bottom of the window, a mask can be selected. Each tab can also hold a description which will be displayed in the tab title in Metis Smart Quotes.

{{Note
| Groups of masks can be edited and modified using the EDIT button. It will open the group of masks definition window and the user make any required changes. Modification will be stored once validated.
}}

To create a group of masks, first make sure to be in the Modeling menu then in the Masks sub-menu.
Click on the add button.
A window opens with a choice between “Mask” and “Group of Masks.” Select “Group of Masks” and confirm.
The “Mask Group” window opens.
Enter a name for the mask group, for example “Desktop (Group).”
The two tables below the “Name” and “Comment” fields allow the user to definite the description of the group and of the different masks to be included in the group.
In the first table, enter in the description for the groups of masks, for example: “Complete Desktop configuration.”
For the second table under Tab 1, enter in the description for the first mask, for example: “Basic Properties”
Open the drop-down list for the “Mask 1” and select a mask. For example: “D-Basic Properties”
Select the Tab 2 and repeat the previous steps. Enter in the description “Peripherals”
From the drop-down list, select “D-Peripherals”
Click on the confirm button
The Group of Masks has now been created and is found in the list.
Select the group of masks and click on the preview button to see how the group of masks will look like in Metis Smart Quotes.
The tabs 1 and 2 have been configured accordingly.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/f/f0/VID_CreatingGroupOfMasks.PNG'>File:Creating a group of masks OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creating and defining a group of masks.
}}

== Linking masks to models ==
A mask cannot live without being part of a model, refer to the [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Models#Creating_a_new_model|section about creating and defining models]].

Description of the Sub-Menu Models

2011-12-19T08:10:08Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Models to Metis Smart Modeling - Models

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Models]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Models

2011-12-19T08:10:08Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Sub-Menu Models to Metis Smart Modeling - Models

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.
== What is a model? ==
A model is the building block of Metis. It allows the application to generate a list of material, service items and configure maintenance based in logic rules defined by the business.

[[Image:Model Pres 1.png|thumb|upright=0.5|alt=Metis Smart Quote Model Description|Metis Smart Quote Model Description]]

This section explains all parameters and techniques to build and maintain models, giving a full understanding of the possibilities behind this functionality. The following sections of this manual will present all aspects related to this task. They are structured based on the different elements required to create full featured models.

The current section describes how a model works and how one can create and maintain it. Based on that information, the following sections describe model building blocks like rules, groups of rules, variables and masks. For consistency purposes, all aspects of the creation of models are based on a full featured example.

== How does a model work? ==
Before explaining how to create and use models, it is necessary to explain how Metis Smart Quote works in order to provide the user with a fully featured offer. Establishing such an offer can be summarized through the following scheme.
[[Image:Model_Metis_SQ_Exec.png|thumb|upright=0.5|alt=Metis Smart Quote Execution Description|Metis Smart Quote Execution Description]]
When an offer is initiated in Metis Smart Quote, '''modeled positions''' are “calculated” based in the information provided in modeling masks. These values represent the customer’s needs. Through the execution of the [[#Material|material]] model, the application creates a list of positions which basically represents the customer’s desired items and all of these products are listed in a structured way.

For example, in the case of a company selling computer systems, requirements will be provided in the modeling masks and after calculation will result in a list of components like computers, servers and network appliances.

All positions listed through the use of models will be in read only mode. Metis Smart Quote allows, however, editing the list by adding '''manual positions'''. All parameters related to them can be manually set, like quantity and [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]].

Based on the previous example, a secondary screen can be added for one or more calculated computers. Or, additional, none modeled network features can be added.

After the two previous steps, Metis Smart Quote will not only list all items required for the offer, but also calculate '''prices'''. This calculation will not only be based on all positions listed in the offer, but also on the pricing settings defined on the positions. For example, a specific computer component, like software licenses may be subject to discounts based on the quantity.

Additionally to defining the list of positions required in an offer, the modeling functionality of Metis Smart Suite, '''services specific models''' can be implemented in the application. Once the pricing of materials and based on the availability of a [[#Service|service]] models, Metis Smart Quote is able to calculated related services through service models and list relevant service position in the offer.

For example, the installation of the complete set of computers and network appliances.

Once the customer required material and service positions defined through the models or manually, the '''global pricing''' of an offer can be calculated by Metis Smart Quote.

On top of that, based on the overall offer, Metis allows to trigger so called Tax models which are executed at the very end of the process. These models can typically be used to '''add sales taxes to an offer''' (VAT or recycling).

In Metis Smart Quote, models appear in different forms, based on their type. For [[#Material|material]] models, the linked masks will be displayed the application in the offer window when selecting the system.

{{Note
| For a full description of the use of models in Metis Smart Quote, refer to the “System configuration” section of the applications menu.
}}

Now that the ground work of the model concept is laid down, it is necessary to understand a bit how such a model works in the Metis environment. As described in figure [[:File:Model_Exec_1.png|Model execution overview]], outside of the masks, a model is built on specific objects. Each model includes at least one “group of rules”, which is a container for individual rules. Those rules are the logic part of the models. Each rule uses input values (variables, [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]], positions) coming from the masks, default or calculated information to process a logic “formula”. A Group of rule can include as many rules as necessary, with the only constrain that the result of a given rule will only be available in the next group of rules in the process. As described in figure [[:File:Model_Exec_2.png|Group of rules execution overview]], a Group of rules feeds on input values which are instantiated before its execution. Once inside, all rules will use those values to process the formulas. When all rules are processed, the resulting variables and/or material positions are prepared for the next Group of rules.Before starting the execution of the next Group of rules, the engine instantiates the new input values and lets the various rules included in the group feed on them.

[[Image:IMG_BLANK.png|500x226px|link=]][[Image:Model_Exec_1.png|500x226px|link=]] [[Image:Model_Exec_2.png|500x226px|link=]]

For example, when configuring a computer, the selection of a specific CPU will influence the list of compatible motherboards. Only when the appropriate one is determined, will the number of specific ports (like USB) be available and used for further configuration.

{{Note
| Additional information on the use of model can be found in [[Metis_Smart_Quote_User_Manual_Home_Page|Metis Smart Quote Manual]], and the examples listed here.
}}

== Model types ==
The Metis environment supports and enables the use of three different types of rules. Overall, the type of the model will determine the "moment" the model will be executed and information it can base itself on. When creating a new model, the user has to select the appropriate type before defining the model.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModels1.PNG|center|354x240px]]

=== Material ===
A model defined as being of type "material" is defined in Metis Smart Modeling to generate a list of material in Metis Smart Quote based on input masks, rules and logic. The result will be displayed in the latest.

The main concept behind this type of model is for the Metis Smart Quote user to be able to enter in a simple and graphic way his customer's requirements and then let the application generate the list of necessary positions. This type can be used in many different ways. For example, in the case of a business selling computer systems, a model can be created which will ask for basic configuration properties and then let the application calculate the various possibilities which may fulfill the customer’s need. The system may then even pre-select the less expensive solution. The other possibility is to define a model which could basically be compared to a component catalog and let the user select the required items manually, but in a graphical environment.

{{Tip
| Refer to the section about model example for a complete presentation about modeling possibilities.
}}

=== Service ===
A model defined as being of type "service" will feed on the generated or manually input list of material in Metis Smart Quote to generate service items. The result will be displayed in the latest.

Usually those models will use the [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]] and position quantities to calculate the required service items. In the displayed list, each of the positions may have [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]] values linked to it. For example, a printer defines a time which is required to install its drivers on the host computer(s). These times will then be processed by the model and generate an additional position which will add up all those times and insert the installation service in the offer.

This functionality can also be used to generate additional material item based on the main material list. For example it can be used to calculate the appropriate backup battery (UPS) for the servers included in the offer.

{{Warning
| Masks cannot be used in conjunction with service models, as they are calculated based on a list of positions.
}}

=== Tax ===
A model defined as being of type "tax" will feed on the generated or manually input list of material in Metis Smart Quote to generate various taxes. The result will be displayed in the latest.

Usually those models will use total or positions specific amounts, the attributes and position quantities to calculate the taxes. With these type of models, the Metis Smart Modeling user can define any number of taxes like VAT or recycling. The result of the model will be displayed on the offer level, as part of the total price.

A tax model is always linked to the overall offer when used in Metis Smart Quotes. The activation of the model thus has to be done based on a specific group of users belonging to a version. This is done via the Tax Models sub-section of the Profiles menu in Metis Smart Modeling.

The definition of a TAX model varies from the definition of the two other types of models, as it basically consist of a formula which should be applied on prices, quantities, variables or attributes. Thus the full definition of it is done in the main model setup window.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModelsTAXDef.PNG|center|706x860px]]

After defining all basic information for the model, like name, descriptions and versioning, the lower part of the window allows to setup the variables to be used and formula which will be calculated. As for formula based rules, the first step is to define which input variables should be used in the formula. by clicking on the add button on the left of the table, the application will show a new window where the user can the type and the item to be used as input variable for the formula. In addition to the standard input items, a tax model can also use prices. The list of price types which can be used is available when selecting the "Items" radio button.

When all required input variable are defined, the formula can be typed in the dedicated field below the table. In the above example, the "Net Sales Price" is multiplied by "1.08" in order to calculated the swiss VAT (8%).

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModelsTAXDef2.PNG|center|706x860px]]

'''List of "items" :'''
* (Is Material Position)
Will return a Boolean value defining of the position being treated is a material position.
* (Is Service Position)
Will return a Boolean value defining of the position being treated is a service position.
* Cost Price
Will return the cost price of the position being treated.
* Gross Price
Will return the gross price (sales price before all discounts) of the position being treated.
* Net Sales Price
Will return the net sales price (sales price after all discounts) of the position being treated.
* Original Sales Price
Will return the original sales price (sales price as by default in the database) of the position being treated.

{{Note
| Whenever one of these "items" is used in a tax formula, the formula will be executed individually on all items and add up the results to display it as a total.
}}

{{Note
| Several TAX models can be applied on an offer.
}}

== Searching and sorting through models ==
The main screen of the "Modeling" tab in Metis Smart Modeling displays the list of all the model available in the version. That list shows the name of the model, its version, type and creation date. On the left-hand side of the screen, it s possible to filter this list. It is possible to select what type of model to display, search by its name and select the models linked to a specific system.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModels.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

== Creating a new model ==
To create a model, first make sure to be in the Modeling menu then in the Models sub-menu.
Click on the add button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]]. The Model window opens.
Select a model type, for example “MAT”. Provide a name for the model, for example “Entry-Level Desktop”, enter a version, for example “1.0”. Enter a description for each available language.
The tables below allow the user to define the two main parts of the model, those being the “masks” and the “groups of rules”
For the masks table, click on the add button.
A window opens where masks and groups of masks can be selected and linked to the model.
Select the desired masks, for example, “D-Basic Hardware” and “D-Peripherals” and then confirm to continue.
For the group of rules table, click on the add button.
A window similar to the masks window opens, but for groups of rules.
Select the desired groups of rules and confirm.
The green up and down arrows found above each table allow the user to modify the display order of the masks as well as the execution order of the groups of rules.

{{Note
| A proper execution of the model depends entirely on the order of the groups of rules.
}}

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModelsDef.PNG‎|center|764x860px]]

A model is basically constructed of 3 main information. Basic properties will define such information as description, type and versioning. The logical part is made of "Group of rules" which will be used to run the calculation and masks which will be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes to allow for input in the model.

* '''Description''' (mandatory) :
A description for the model, usually a name.
* '''Type''' ( mandatory) :
Each model requires to be typed. On this information will depend the moment the model is executed when used in Metis Smart Quotes.
* '''Versioning''' :
When updating a model based on an old one, this information is very useful to keep track of the different versions.
* '''Masks''' :
List of [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Masks|masks]] used in this model. Once the model is linked to a system, the listed mask will appear in Metis Smart Quotes when configuring the system in the "Design" section.
* '''Group of rules''' :
List of [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Group_of_Rules|groups of rules]] to be used when executing the model in Metis Smart Quotes. The order of the groups of rules is very important for the model to generate concrete and valid results.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/7/71/VID_CreatingAModel.PNG'>File:Creating a model OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation of a new model, selection of linked groups of rules and masks.
}}

{{Note
| A model service or material model doesn't have influence on a configuration without fully configured groups of rules and in the case on material models masks.
}}

{{Note
| The example used above applies on material models as well as service models. Only tax model are defined in a different way.
}}

The model definition window also allows to setup which systems will use the model when inserted in an offer in Metis Smart Quotes. By moving to the second tab in the window a list of all system defined in Metis Smart Modeling is displayed and lets the user validate the system(s) which should use this models with the appropriate offer type.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCModelsDef2.PNG‎|center|764x860px]]

{{Tip
| The System tab is very useful to have an overview of which systems use the selected model.
}}

== Deleting a model ==
A model can be deleted by using the "Delete" button on the main screen. When deleting a model from there, the masks and group of rules which were linked to it are not deleted. The reason for this is that those parts could be used in other models or re-used in a new one. This way only the binding object is removed from the application.

{{Note
| Deleting a model only removes the "container" form the Metis Database, all masks and groups of rules which were linked to it will not be deleted!
}}

To delete a model, first make sure to be in the Modeling menu then in the Models sub-menu.
Select the model to be deleted and click on the delete button[[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. A confirmation window opens. Validated the question in order to remove the selected model from the Metis Database.

{{Note
| As in order section of Metis Smart Modeling, deletion of objects cannot be undone.
}}

== Modifying a model ==
To edit an existing model, first make sure to be in the Modeling menu then in the Models sub-menu.
Select the model to be modified and click on the edit button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The Model window opens.
Apply all necessary modifications based on the explanations available in the previous section about creating and defining a new model. Once done validate the windows to apply the changes.

{{Note
| In an online environment of Metis, all modifications are applied immediately.
}}

{{Tip
| Test and debug all newly created or modified models before distributing it to the Metis Smart Quotes users through privileged settings.
}}

Description of the Menu Modeling

2011-12-19T08:09:49Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Modeling to Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling

2011-12-19T08:09:49Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Modeling to Metis Smart Modeling - Modeling

Metis Smart Modeling allows the definition of models, which are then used in Metis Smart Quote to establish offers containing automatically generated positions (material and services) according to predefined parameters, rules and user input.

The goal of defining models is to ease the work of Metis Smart Quote users during the definition phase of offers. Each business requires a very complex know-how, thus the definition of predefined models enables the user to configure up to 100% technically valid offers based on the vast selection of products and services available. It allows them to concentrate on core information and save time by letting the application make all the complex calculations and configuration validation.

This part of the Metis Smart Modeling Manual will guide the reader through all different menus and functionalities available in the application in order for him to achieve the creation of a complete model using rules, masks and all related objects.

The Modeling menu consists of the following sub-menus:

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Models | Models]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Masks | Masks]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Group of Rules | Group of Rules]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Rules | Rules]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Check Rules | Check Rules]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Variables | Variables]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Linked Values | Linked Values]]

* [[Description of the Sub-Menu Debug | Debug]]

* [[Additional considerations to models | Additional considerations to models]]

Each sub-menus are described in their respective sections.

Description of the Menu Systems

2011-12-19T08:09:29Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Systems to Metis Smart Modeling - Systems

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Systems]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Systems

2011-12-19T08:09:29Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Systems to Metis Smart Modeling - Systems

In the Metis environment, a system is a logical entity which is the building block of an offer in Metis Smart Quote. It holds most of the basic configuration information for the material and the services which will then be list in the quote. On its own the system doesn't include any type of position, but will be the container for them. They will be added through either models, or manual input from the Metis Smart Quote user. Through its role in Metis Smart Quote it one of the most important aspect of Metis Smart Modeling as settings and information will be defined there to use models. System can be of three type (System, Group of systems and Applications) all with there specificity.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''System'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Logical entity of Metis Smart Quote to build an offer on.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Group of systems'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingGroupOfSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Applications'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingApplicationIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Applications sub entities of systems (sometimes called subsystems).
|-
|}

== Systems ==

The main screen of the system section in Metis Smart Modeling is built as pictured below. It include a search sidebar in order to browse and filter through the list of systems which is displayed on right side of screen.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystems.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

===System Properties===
In a system, the following information can be provided:

* '''Description''' (mandatory)
A description for the system, usually a name, can be added in all of the active languages.
* '''Remark'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.
* '''Product Name'''
A system can also be assigned a name using the text field. This information is also known as the "Internal Product Name", and is limited to 8 characters. All systems which have an "Internal Product Name" will bear a White Flag. When an offer contains a system with this White Flag, the system must comply with defined processes in order to be valid.
* '''Disable'''
A system can also be disabled. Once disabled, the System will appear in red in the various lists of Metis Smart Modeling.
* '''System Family'''
In order to be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes, a system, a group of systems or an application has to be part of a family of systems. This drop-down list allows to select the appropriate family for the current system.
* '''Hierarchy'''
A default hierarchy can be linked to a system. This setting will pre-select the defined hierarchy by Metis Smart Quotes when an item is added manually to an offer.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsGeneral.PNG|center|706x860px]]

====Pictures====
Each system, group of systems or application can be completed with a picture. The procedure is similar to selecting a picture for a product. First the picture needs to be added in the [[Description_of_the_Sub-Menu_Cliparts|Metis picture library]] and then linked to the system.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsPictures.PNG|center|706x860px]]

With the same idea as for models, pictures can be set as conditional to value set in the offer. Defining rules for pictures is a quite straightforward process. Conditions can be defined to automatically choose which image will be displayed to represent a system in QSBW. In order to set this up, it is required to fill in a line of the table on the lower part of the pictures tab. By click the ADD button, the list of available pictures appears and one can be selected by double-clicking on it. The next step is to define the filter which will be used to determine whether this pictures will be displayed. Double-clicking in the cell will bring up the list of all variables, selecting on and validating the windows will set it as the filter variable. The last step is to select the appropriate condition and to set the value to which the variable should be weighted.

{{Note
| When the condition for displaying one or another picture is based on a variable which will be instantiated only through an input in a mask, it requires the mask to be validated in order for the picture to change in Metis Smart Quote.
}}

{{Note
| Pictures can be assigned in the same way for Groups of Systems and Applications.
}}

====Models====
Material models can be assigned or linked to each offer type relating to a specific system. In order to do that, under the "Models" tab of the edition window of a system there is a table/list which displays all the defined offer types. In the second column, it is possible to double-click in order to bring up a windows where a model can be select for this offer type and system. Validation is required in order to store the selection. The application then displays the models set for each offer type.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsEditModel.PNG‎|center|706x860px|link=]]

The second tab, above the table, allows to set service models which will be executed when using the system in Metis Smart Quotes. When selecting this tab the list below will be refreshed an display all the defined service models which have been created in Metis Smart Modeling. In order to link a service model to the system, simple validate the checkbox in front of the appropriate model. Because service calculation can be used for many purposes, the green arrows on the left of the table allow the user to select in which order the selected service models should be executed, as one of them could require the result of another to be valid.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsEditModel2.PNG‎|center|706x860px|link=]]

{{Note
| Service models will also be displayed in the selected order in the design screen of Metis Smart Quotes.
}}

====Limits====

This section allows to assign limits (Positions, Attributes, or Variables) to each system, group of systems or application. Those limits will then be used when comparing several system in order to highlight the limits which have been crossed by the input given in the masks.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsLimits.PNG|center|706x860px]]

Refer to [[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems#Setting_up_modelization_settings|this section]] for instructions on how to define limits for a system.

====Comparison====
The comparison function allows to select different systems to be compared to other systems or applications. The selected comparable system will then be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes in a dedicated section of the application. The user will be able to compare the listed systems based on the various limits set for each system.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsComparison.PNG|center|706x860px]]

Refer to [[Description_of_the_Menu_Systems#Setting_up_modelization_settings|this section]] for instructions on how to comparable systems for a system.

====Default Configuration====
This section allows to determine default configurations for systems, groups of systems and applications using variables. Those value are closely linked to the use of models to work with the system, group of system or application. The concept is that they will be automatically used as input for the models without requiring input from the Metis Smart Quotes user. It particularly practical when requiring base value for a specific system. For example, in the case of a small business server, the number of users; or for an entry-level computer the set number of screens.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsDefConf.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note| Throughout the execution of models, default configuration values are never modified and cannot be used as outputs for rules.
}}

====Linked With====

Applications are systems which are linked to other systems and which can can only be used in Metis Smart Quotes if the "main" system is inserted in the offer. They are often also called "subsystems". The linked with tab will show the link between the selected system and "subsystems". Applying changes is done be using the two arrows between the two lists. The left one shows what is linked to the current system and the right one what is compatible for being linked to it. Moving entries from one list to the other is all that is required in order to configure the links.

For example for a large corporate server, the subsystems linked to the "main" system could be the various server applications which can be installed on the server. See the example below.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsLInkedWith.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note| In the case a system is selected, the information displayed in the tab will show the applications linked to it. In the case an application is selected, it will show all the systems to which it is linked.
}}

===Groups of System ===
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared. When applying a model to the group, Metis Smart Quote will access all of the information available within the group of systems to choose the “best option” depending upon the client's needs (“best option” meaning the one which fits all requirements and has the lowest price).

To best compare systems, Metis Smart Quote must have access to the information linked to all of the available systems (i.e. not limited through rights settings). Groups of Systems are very useful when choosing between different alternatives from the client's point of view.

In a Group of System, the following information can be provided:
* '''Description''' (mandatory)
A description for the group of systems, usually a name, can be added in all of the active languages.
* '''Remark'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.
* '''Product Name'''
A group of systems can also be assigned a name using the text field. This information is also known as the "Internal Product Name", and is limited to 8 characters. All systems which have an "Internal Product Name" will bear a White Flag. When an offer contains a system with this White Flag, the system must comply with defined processes in order to be valid.
* '''Disable'''
A group of systems can also be disabled. Once disabled, the group of systems will appear in red in the various lists of Metis Smart Modeling.
* '''System Family'''
In order to be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes, a system, a group of systems or an application has to be part of a family of systems. This drop-down list allows to select the appropriate family for the current system.
* '''Pictures'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Models'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Linked With'''
Systems included in this group. The model linked to the group will be applied to all of them and they will be displayed as the result of the group in Metis Smart Quote.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsGrpofSys.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| Limits and default configurations of all the systems included in the group will be used when executing the group in Metis Smart Quote.
}}

{{Note
| When Metis Smart Quote executes the model linked to the group, it basically executes it on all systems it contains. This will result in several configurations. The tool then allows the user to select the one required or most suitable. When displaying the resulting configuration, Metis Smart Quotes also displays for each system the defined limits. When one of those is crossed, it renders the system invalid for the offer based on the input provided through the masks of the group of systems model.
}}

===Applications===

Applications, also called sub-system, are fully configurable system which can only exist in Metis Smart Quotes when used along with a "main-system". They hold the same properties as regular systems but need to be linked to a "main-system" in order to be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.

In an application, the following information can be provided:
* '''Description''' (mandatory)
A description for the application, usually a name, can be added in all of the active languages.
* '''Remark'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.
* '''Product Name'''
An application can also be assigned a name using the text field. This information is also known as the "Internal Product Name", and is limited to 8 characters. All systems which have an "Internal Product Name" will bear a White Flag. When an offer contains a system with this White Flag, the system must comply with defined processes in order to be valid.
* '''Disable'''
An application can also be disabled. Once disabled, the System will appear in red in the various lists of Metis Smart Modeling.
* '''Hierarchy'''
A default hierarchy can be linked to an application. This setting will pre-select the defined hierarchy by Metis Smart Quotes when an item is added manually to an offer.
* '''Pictures'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Models'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Limits'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Default Configuration'''
(same as for systems)
* '''Linked With'''
This list of all (main) systems to which the application is linked. meaning that it needs to be added to an offer before being able to add the application.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsSubSys.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| In the execution process of models in Metis Smart Quote, applications are executed first and "main" systems afterwards. This allows to pass information from a "sub" to a "main" system.
}}

{{Note
| In Metis Smart Quotes configuration results are displayed inside of the sub-entity of the offer.
}}

===Creating a system===
In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu.
Click on the "Add" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
This opens a small window asking which type of system to create.
System is selected by default. Click on confirm to continue.
The System window opens.
Name the system for all available languages. For example, name it “Custom Desktop.”
Select a system family from the drop-down menu, for example “Desktops.” Then select a hierarchy from the drop-down menu, for example, “hardware.”
Move on to the Pictures tab.
To add a graphical representation for the system, click on the Add button.
This opens a window with all the system pictures previously inserted from the Data Management menu.
Select a file then double click on it.
The picture is added.
Click on confirm to save the changes.
The system has been created and now appears in the list of systems.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating a System OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and setting-up of a system
}}

===Setting up modelization settings===

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Managing_the_system_modeling_properties_OK.mp4‎</mediaplayer>
| Set-up and manage modelisation related aspects of a system definition.
}}

===Creating a group of systems===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu.
Click on the add button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
This opens a small window asking which type of system to create.
System is selected by default. Select "Group of systems". Click on confirm to continue.
The Group of Systems window opens.
Name the group of system for all available languages. For example, name it “Desktop Automatic Selection”
Select a system family from the drop-down menu, for example “Desktops”. Then select a hierarchy from the drop-down menu, for example, “hardware”.
Move on to the Pictures tab.
To add a graphical representation for the group of systems, click on the Add button.
This opens a window with all the system pictures previously inserted from the Data Management menu.
Select a file then double click on it.
The picture is added.
Click on confirm to save the changes.
The group of systems has been created and now appears in the list of systems.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300' image='http://www.xpert-technologies.ch/mediawikidev/images/f/fd/VID_CreatingGroupOfSystems.PNG'>File:Creating Group of Systems Truncated OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and setting-up of a group of systems.
}}

===Creating an application===
In the “Systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu.
Click on the “Add” button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window asking which type of system to create. Select “sub-system” and confirm to continue.
The “Subsystem” window opens.
In the Description field, name the subsystem for the available languages. For example, type in “Application Server.”
Click on the “Hierarchy” drop down menu and select the appropriate hierarchy. For example, choose “software.”
Click on the “Linked With” tab. In this tab, the systems to link with the sub-system are defined.
Under the Description column, select “Large Business Server.”
Using the green arrow, move “Large Business Server” to the “member” column on the left. Click on confirm to save the changes.
“Application Server” now appears in the systems list.
To check to see if “Application Server” is linked with “Large Business Server,” select “Large Business Server” and click on the “Preview” button.
This opens the “System” window. Click on the “Linked With” tab.
In the “Member” list, all the “subsystems” linked with “Large Business Server” are shown.
“Application Server” is part of the list and therefore linked with “Large Business Server”

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating_a_subsystem_OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and setting-up of an application (subsystem).
}}

{{Tip
| Test and debug all newly created or modified systems, group of systems or applications (subsystems) before distributing it to the Metis Smart Quotes users through privileged settings.
}}

===Modifying a system, a group of systems or an application===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu. Select the system, group of systems or application. Click on the "Edit" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The window corresponding to the selected object opens. It allows to apply modifications to any part of the select object. Please refer to the section above for information about all different parts of the object. Changes will be stored only when the window is validated. To do this, click on the confirmation button.

===Deleting a system, a group of systems or an application===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu. Select the system, group of systems or application. Click on the "Delete" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window asking requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected object. Once confirmed it will be definitively deleted.

== Systems Families ==

In the Metis environment, a system family is a abstract container in which system need to be placed in order for them to be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes. With Metis Smart Modeling, as many system families as required in order to sort systems can be created.

In an application, the following information can be provided:
* '''Description''' (mandatory)
A description for the system family, usually a name, can be added in all of the active languages.
* '''Member'''
List of systems contained in the current system family.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCFamilies.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

{{Note
| In order for a system, a group of systems or an application to be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes it needs to be included in a family.
}}

{{Warning
| It is important not to mix up the use of Families with Group of Systems: Families are intended to put together systems which resemble other systems and list them the Metis Smart Quotes. Group of Systems are intended to group systems that can be compared to one another.
}}

{{Tip
| Allow for sufficient system families to sort all systems planned in the environment.
}}

===Creating a system family===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “System Family” sub-menu.
Click on the add button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
This opens a system family window allowing to enter all information related to the new system family.
Name the system family for all available languages. For example, name it “Desktops”
Select syetms which should be included in the family. Use the green arrows to move them into the family.
Click on confirm to save the changes.
The system family has been created and now appears in the list of system families.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:Creating a System Family OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and setting-up of a system family.
}}

===Modifying a system family===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “System Families” sub-menu. Select a system family. Click on the "Edit" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]]. The window allowing to apply modifications to any part of the select system family opens. Please refer to the section above for information about all different parts of the system family. Changes will be stored only when the window is validated. To do this, click on the confirmation button.

===Deleting a system family===

In the “systems” menu, make sure to select the “Systems” sub-menu. Select the system family. Click on the "Delete" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected system family. Once confirmed it will be definitively deleted and the system it used to contain may not be linked to any families anymore.

{{Note
| When a system family is deleted, the systems which were list in it are not deleted. I f they are not listed in another family they will not be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes anymore.
}}

Description of the Menu Attributes

2011-12-19T08:08:38Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Attributes to Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes

#REDIRECT [[Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes]]

Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes

2011-12-19T08:08:38Z

Adminwiki: moved Description of the Menu Attributes to Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes

== Attributes ==

In Metis, attributes are additional position related information which can be defined as being basically anything. A position is defined through its parameters like order number, description or price for example. Those are predefined information which can describe a position. In many cases they are sufficient, but in order to enhance them, attributes can be defined in Meths Smart Modeling. Attributes can be pictured as customizable position properties. The user can define as many attributes as necessary (they will then appear linked to every position listed in the database). Along with every attribute, the user can also specify an appropriate [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] (for example, service hours will have “hours” as quantity units. Most commonly attributes are used to provide positions with characteristics which can then be used in models or to display technical aspects of an offer.

The most commonly used type of attributes which can be defined here are, for example, service hours. If a position requires 5 minutes to be installed or maintained, an attribute can be defined to hold this value for a specific items.

By default, all attributes will be available for all positions. A real link between a position and its attribute is only done once the attribute holds a value. This allows, through Metis Smart Modeling, to set numerical characteristics to positions. Once a position is inserted in an offer, the defined attributes is displayed and can be modified ( based on [[#Systems|defined settings]]), but attributes for which no values have been given in Metis Smart Modeling can be edited in Metis Smart Quotes. This means that the values provided through Metis Smart Modeling can be used in models and that Metis Smart Quotes can allow its user to modify those values.

Attributes can also be used to specify such product properties as:
* Characteristics (weight, size, …)
* Technical information (I/O points, electrical consumption, …)
* Additional descriptive information (number of USB ports,...)
* Etc…

Attributes can be used in rules as input. It is especially useful in Service models. For example installation times can be added in order to calculate the total number of hours required to setup the content of the offer.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCAttributes.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| Attributes are version specific.
}}

{{Tip
| Use Metis Data import functonnalities to ease setting values for attributes.
}}

=== Basic Properties ===

Each attribute defined in Metis Smart Modeling is based on the following information:

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attribute Name'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | The name which will be used to identify the attribute within the whole Metis environment.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''Quantity Unit'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Optional [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] related to the attribute. (i.e. KG for weight)
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | '''Description'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | The name which will be displayed to the user in Metis Smart Modeling and Metis Smart Quotes for the attribute. It can be provided in all available languages.
|-
|}

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCAttributes2.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| If the required quantity unit doesn't appear in the list, it needs to be created using the available functionality in the "Positions" menu.
}}

Metis Smart Modeling also allows the definition of attributes which can hold a monetary value. For example, in the case of a recycling tax which has to be considered on all material positions listed in the application. In this case, the definition on the attributes can be extend with a currency. This is done be selecting the "<Currency>" item in the Quantity Units drop-down list. Doing so will display an additional list to select which currency has to be used for the attribute's values. Metis Smart Quotes will then automatically apply the defined exchange rate when the attributes is used if the offer is set in a different currency.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCAttributes5.PNG|center|706x860px]]

{{Note
| The most common situation where this type of attributes is used, is in TAX models.
}}

=== Values ===
Summary of all values given for the current attribute within the list of positions. Selection can be done on the content of the list :
* Display only positions with a value
* Display all positions

This list enables the user to set values to for the current attribute to any position. Setting a value is done by selecting the corresponding column in the table for the desired position and entering a value. Entered values will only be saved once the window has been validated. Meaning that all input can be canceled by closing the windows with the X button.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCAttributes3.PNG|center|706x860px]]

All of the values entered here may be displayed and used in the calculation process in Metis Smart Quotes. By sorting and searching through the list, defining values for position can be done in no time. On the other hand, it is also a great way to verify values which have been imported through the various data import functions available by default in Metis Smart Modeling or added to the environment based on organization specific requirements.

=== Systems ===
As certain values assigned to positions through an attribute sometimes should be modified once the position is used in an offer in Metis Smart Quotes, Metis Smart Modeling allows to set for which system the current attribute is either editable, visible or completely hidden. By selecting the most suitable state in the drop-down list, the selection is set for the listed system.

Selection can be done on the content of the list :
* Display all systems with a status
* Display all systems

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCAttributes4.PNG|center|706x860px]]

Possible selection :
* Undefined - this is the default state and is equivalent to editable
* Editable - the end user can edit this attribute
* Not editable - the end user cannot edit this attribute
* Invisible - end user will not see this attribute, but it can be used for modelling

=== Creating an attribute ===
In the “Attributes” menu, click on the “Add” button [[File:MetisSmartModelingAddButton.PNG|link=]].
The “Attribute” window opens. In the “Attribute Name” field, name the attribute. For example, “Weight.”
In the “Quantity Unit” field, select a unit from the drop down menu. For example, select “Kilograms.”
Enter a description for the available languages.
Move to the “Values” tab. All the available positions in this version are displayed.
Select a position to modify and double click on its value to edit it.
For example, for the “19’’ LCD Screen” position, change the value to “5.25.” Now move to the “Systems” tab.
All the available systems in this version are displayed.
On this tab, it is possible to enable or disable the editing of the attribute or even hide the attribute.
For example, select DB server then click on the drop-down menu in the Status column.
If “Editable” is selected, then the Smart Quotes user is able to edit the weight attribute for all the positions appearing under the DB server system.
If “Not editable” is selected, then the Smart Quotes user is not able to edit the weight attribute for all the positions appearing under the DB server system.
If “Invisible” is selected, then the Smart Quotes user does not see the weight attribute for all the positions appearing under the DB server system.
Define a status for the systems and once finished, click on confirm to continue.
The “weight” attribute is now created and listed.

{{Video
| <mediaplayer width='400' height='300'>File:CreatingAGroupOfRules OK.mp4</mediaplayer>
| Creation and edition of an attribute.
}}

=== Modifying an attribute ===

In the “Attributes” menu, select the appropriate attribute and click on the “Edit” button [[File:MetisSmartModelingEditButton.PNG|link=]].
The “Attribute” window opens. It allows to apply modifications to any part of the attribute. Please refer to the section above for information about all different parts. Changes will be stored only when the window is validated. To do this, click on the confirmation button.

=== Deleting an attribute ===

In the “Attributes” menu, select the appropriate attribute and click on the "Delete" button [[File:MetisSmartModelingDeleteButton.PNG|link=]]. This opens a small window requesting to confirm the deletion of the selected attribute. Once confirmed it will be definitively deleted along with all the values given to specific positions.

== Attributes Sets ==

<del>As described above for attributes, each position can hold a single value for each attribute. In some cases, it might be relevant for one position to have different attribute values depending on the system in which it is used. For example</del>

<del>Can be used to set identical values to attributes in sets. If no values have been set specifically to the position, it will take the value defined in the attributes set.</del>

<del>In the Attributes Set subsection, the user can define groups of attributes which will inherit the same attributes. The first step is to create the group using the top menu or right-click menu in the uppermost table. Then, the user should define the value which should be linked to the different attributes. The third step is to link the item to the sets. As shown in the image below, using the and buttons, the user can specify which products should be included in the set and thus inherit the attribute values.</del>

{{Note
| <del>If an item is defined in a set, the attribute values given directly to the item will have priority over the ones given to the whole set.</del>
}}

Metis Smart Modeling - Rules

2011-09-02T09:40:55Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSQ" to "Metis Smart Quotes"

Description of the general concept of rules and what they are used for.

== What is a rule? ==
[[Image:Model_Exec_3.png|thumb|upright=0.5|alt=Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description|Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description]]
a determinate method for performing a mathematical operation and obtaining a certain result

Detailed description of a rule and its components.

Link to the execution process of models.

A rule may be made of three different parts which can work together :
*'''Filter'''
*'''Formula'''
*'''Add-On's''''

A rule may use the following items in its different parts :
{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Object
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Positions'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingPositionIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
material and service '''Positions''' (input and output) can be used as a parameter (taking into account the quantity) or as output (setting the quantity through the execution of the formula)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attributes'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
()
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input only) [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]] values added over the complete offer can be used as input for rules
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input and output) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account its value) or as an output in the formula or add-on part of a rule (the obtained value will be set to the variable)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Group of variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableGroupIcon.png‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input only) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account the sum of all the positions and variables it includes)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Assembly of groups of variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
(input only)can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account the sum of all the positions, variables and groups of variables it includes)
|-
|}

== Creating a rule ==
Using the ADD button,

Rule structure

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRulesDef.PNG|center|706x860px]]

Rules are divided into 7 categories, and can be defined...

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

=== Description ===
Mandatory and optional fields (use and where will the information be displayed)

When creating a new rule, the user has the possibility of entering a comment that will be displayed on reports.

Once the rule has been saved, the ID field will automatically be completed by Metis Smart Modeling. The generated identification code is unique worldwide and can be useful for searching for a rule or debugging it, if necessary.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; background-color : transparent;"
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''No treatment of the rest''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If this checkbox is ticked, any fractions of output resulting from a rule will not be taken into account. This means that the result will only be composed of whole units.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''White Flag (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
White flags, simply by the presence of an system name, are considered to be applied on the order level. The influence in Metis Smart Quotes is that the ordering process will be blocked for the Metis Smart Quotes end user until an external configurator control can be performed, but it will still be possible to view and print offer documents. There is no icon to represent the White Flag applied on the order level.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Grey Flag (Order)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Grey Flags are intended for systems which do not have system names. Similar to the White Flag, they also require Metis Smart Quotes end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems with Grey Flags will have to be performed manually by an especially authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like White Flags. Will be applied on the order level, meaning that the ordering process will be blocked for the Metis Smart Quotes end user until a manual control can be performed. It will still be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents, however.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
''Grey Flag (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Grey Flags are intended for systems which do not have system names. Similar to the White Flag, they also require Metis Smart Quotes end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems with Grey Flags will have to be performed manually by an especially authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like White Flags. Will be applied on the offer level. It is basically the same as the Grey Flag (Order) with the added restriction that it will not be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents.
|-
|}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="50%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''White Flag''' (EKB Name)
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Grey Flag''' (no EKB Name)
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Applied on the '''Order Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until manual control has been completed.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Applied on the '''Offer Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until manual control has been competed.
|-
|}

{{Note
| Whether the Grey Flag has been placed on the order level or offer level, there will be no difference in the display in QSBW. The same small yellow icon will be displayed for either one.
}}

{{Note
| Only one type of Grey Flag can be active on a rule at a time.
}}

{{Note
| The White Flag (Offer) and a Grey Flag can be active on the same rule at the same time. However, Grey Flags will not have any influence on a system which has a system name. Systems which have a system name will only take into account whether or not the White Flag (Offer) has been applied. Conversely, the White Flag (Offer) setting will have no influence on systems which do not have a system name.
}}

=== Filter ===
Enabling the rule only under specific conditions
The Variable Filter validates the rule according to variables, products, or groups of variables.

To select a new variable, select a line and click to enter. Give the name, or part of the name of your parameter or a space to select all and click “ENTER.”

=== Formula ===
Setting up the rule, see formula types for detailed description of how to setup each of them

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

=== Add-on ===
Additional results from the rule based on the result of the "formula"

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

=== Rule types ===

Rules which can be configured in Metis are divided into 7 categories:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type of rule
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Single selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleSIngle.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The [[#Single_Selection|Single Selection]] rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Table selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleTable.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Table_Selection|Table Selection]] is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Optimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleOptimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Optimal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Maximal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMaximal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Maximal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Minimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMinimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Minimal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Formula selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleFormula.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Formulas|formula based rule]] is to use arithmetic and logic function to calculate an output for a rule.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''External selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleExternal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The goal of an [[#External_Selection|external rule]] is to use a third party application (software) to calculate the output of a rule.
|-
|}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Value
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q from'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the lower limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q from" value is 5, then the rule will provide an output. The "Q from" value can also be considered as a base value for the system in which the model is used.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q to'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the upper limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q to" value is 4, then the rule will not provide an output.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q in'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Q out'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
|}

==== Single Selection ====
The single selection rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation. The Input "object" can be of any type available, but the output one can only be a position or a variable. If the input is set to be a variable, its value may come directly from a field placed in a mask or a default value. The output quantity ("Q out") is determined by the input quantity ("Q in"). If they are both set to "1", then for every number of input there will be an output. On the other hand, if the "Q out" fields is set to 2, it means that for every input there will be 2 output.

{{Warning
| Beware that if the "Q in" field is left empty, the output will be equal to the input. The output value will always be equal to the input value, for any “Q in” value.
}}

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

A filter or limit to the execution of the rule can be set with the "Q from" and "Q to" fields by giving a scope in which the input/output relation should be executed. If the "Q from" field is left empty, this means that the rule is valid for input values greater or equal than 0. An d if the "Q to" field is also left empty, then it means that the rule is valid up to infinite input values.

{{Note
| Only the input value will be considered by the range filter.
}}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Output will have the same quantity as Input.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
5
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
1 output will be added to each group of 5 units of input.
If Q in = 3, Q out = 1

If Q in = 8, Q out = 2

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3

If the parameter ‘No Treatment of the rest' is activated, the result would be:
If Q in = 3, Q out = 0

If Q in = 8, Q out = 1

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Table Selection====
The goal is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q from
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q to
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
2
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
3
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the input in defined between 1 and 3, the output will be 2.
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
12
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the input is defined between 4 and 12, then the output will be 4.
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Optimal Selection ====
This very performing rule enables the automatic selection of the best alternative depending on the output quantity required and the related price. This rule is particularly appreciated in selecting products when one input corresponds to several possible output results.

This type of rule allows:
# Query of product quantity according to the selected product (from the highest to the lowest)
# Optimization of product quantity (priority 1: the least amount of cards possible)

Basically, the application will calculate all output as if they were "Single selection" rules and then compare all results based on the resulting price. With this result it will then chose the least expensive one as the output of the rule.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
24 and 8
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1 and 1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the number of analogue ports needed is 30, the best configuration for the customer is to have 1 module with 24 ports and 1 with 8 ports.
If the number of analogue ports needed is 35, QS will control which configuration would be the best for the customer between 1 x 24 + 2 x 8 and 2 x 24. The least expensive solution will be preferred and set as output.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1, 100 and 1000
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1 for each
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the number of licenses needed is 850, QS will test the different possibilities and select the cheapest one:
* 8 x 100 + 50 x 1
* 9 x 100
* 1 x 1000
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Maximal Selection ====
This type of rule can be used when several input values influence a specific output. Each line will be used as a single criterion and Metis will return the higher result possible.

It is particularly useful when the goal is to define a minimal number of one position in order to satisfy several criteria.

When the input quantity is not within the indicated range (Q from – Q to), the line will not be valid, thus not considered by the rule.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

TABLE WITH SAMPLE VALUES

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Minimal Selection ====
This type of rule uses the same logic as the Maximal Rule, but the lowest value will be returned as an output result.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

TABLE WITH SAMPLE VALUES

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Formulas ====
Mathematical formula

In some cases, the previous rules categories are not sufficient for a suitable result. The formula rules may be very helpful in calculating services associated to certain equipment.

The main mathematical functions that may be used in rules are described in the table below:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Function
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Description
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Syntax
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Abs'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the absolute value of a numeric expression (integer or real).
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Abs(<Numeric>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real absolute value sought

<Numeric>: Numeric expression, integer or real numeric expression or numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Round'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the rounded value of a numeric value according to the specified number of decimal.
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Round(<Numeric Value> [,<Number of Decimals>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real rounded value of the specified numeric value.
<Numeric Value>: Real or currency numeric value to round. We recommend that you use the currency type in order to get reliable results.

'''Numeric Value'''
If <Numeric Value> is included between:

0 et 0.49: the number is rounded to 0. For example, 3.2 is rounded to 3 (no decimal).

0.5 and 0.99: the number is rounded to 1. For example, 3.7 is rounded to 4 (no decimal).
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsOdd'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an odd number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsOdd(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is odd, False otherwise.

<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsEven'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an even number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsEven(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is even, False otherwise.
<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number Integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Max'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the greatest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Max(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the greatest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Min'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the smallest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Min(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the smallest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''DecimalPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the decimal part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = DecimalPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IntegerPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the integer part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IntegerPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought. Corresponds to the largest integer smaller than or equal to <Number>.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Power'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Raises a number to a power
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Power(<Number to Raise>, <Exponent>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real result of the <Number to Raise> to the power of <Exponent>.

<Number to Raise>: Integer or real number to raise to the power.

<Exponent>: Integer or real exponent.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Root'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the root of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Root(<Number> [,<Root Factor>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real root of the number.

<Number>: Integer or real number to use.

<Root Factor>: Integer or real factor of the root (2 for a square root, 3 for a cubic root, ...). If this parameter is not specified, the square root of <Number> is returned.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Log'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the logarithm of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Log(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Ln'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the Napierian logarithm (reverse of exponential) of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Ln(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number??
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcSin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc sine of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcSin(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc sine (angle in degrees of the sine) of the specified numeric value, found in the [-90, 90] interval.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (sine) to use. This value must be found in the [-1,1] interval. Otherwise, an error occurs.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc tangent of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcTan(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc tangent (angle in degrees of the tangent) of the specified numeric value, included in the [-90,90] interval (excluding bounds).

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (tangent) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcCos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the arc cosine of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArCos(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>:

<Numeric Value>:
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Cos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cosine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Cos(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cosine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. This parameter can have any value: the cosine calculation is performed "modulo 360".
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''CoTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cotangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = CoTan(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cotangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 0°, 180° or -180°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Exp'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the exponential of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Exp(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real exponential sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Sin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle sine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Sin(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real sine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Tangent'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the angle tangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Tangent(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real tangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 90°, -90°, 270° or -270°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
???
|-
|}

==== External Selection====
For very complex rules, an external file might be used to implement them in Metis Smart Modeling. The purpose of this rule type is to allow the development of algorithms which may not be handled in Metis. The file linked to such rule should a compiled program which can be started by providing at least one parameter and which returns '''only one''' value. This file can be searched through the External File Name button on the right. In order for a new file to be displayed in that list it has to be "imported" through the ... .

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

=== Testing rules ===

All rules which have been created in Metis Smart Modeling can be tested in various ways, either on their own or as part of the group they belong. This section of the manual will focus on testing a rule by itself, for more information about other tests please refer to XXX.

INPUT VALUES (Filter and input)
In the above table, value can be given to specific inputs for testing the current rule. The listed inputs include both the ones used as input for the rule and the ones used in the filter part of the rule. It goes without saying that in order to get a result from the test that all filters need to be valid.

OUTPUT VALUES (Output and Add-on)
In the lower table, results will be displayed based on the inputs given and the rule itself. The listed result include both the output defined in the rule and the "Add-on" specified.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

{{Note
| Because optimal rule take into account the prices of the various possible results, the testing window allows to set which "Price category" should be used for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

{{Note
| Because some products may not be available for specific variants, the testing window allows to set a preferred "Variant" for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

== Structuring rules together ==
Execution scheme and considerations (changing execution order)

re-use concept; duplicate, copy and move group of rules

One simple example to described the importance of planning in advance the structure of the rules within a group or the groups themselves is in the scope of the configuration of a computer the calculation of the memory modules required. One way to accommodate this situation is to let the user input the requested amount of memory he would like to have configured in his machine.

The first rule will determine the number of 1 GB modules required to suit his needs. For example the input is 4 GB and the result is 4 modules of 1 GB each. The situation would be more complicated if the user had chosen 8 GB and that the machine could only hold 4 modules in total. This means that the model requires a second rule to check the number of 1 GB module against the number of slots available. In the example of a input equal to 8, the resulting number of modules is 8. The second rule could then take this value and modify the result to 2 GB modules thus making it possible to be installed on the machine.

Because in this situation the second needs to have the result of the first one available in order to use it has an input it is necessary that second be placed in another group of rules which should be executed after the one containing the first rule.

{{Note
| On the main rule screen, listing all rules within a single group, they can be sorted. This functionality is only a visual help for the user. Based on the execution scheme of models, sorting rule within a group doesn't have any effect on the result of the group. If rule need to be executed a sequential order, then they should be placed in sequential groups.
}}

== Modifying a rule ==
Using the EDIT button, consideration for rules which are used in more then one group of rules.

== Deleting a rule ==
Using the DELETE button, consideration for rules which are used in more then one group of rules.

Metis Smart Modeling - Masks

2011-09-02T09:40:42Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSQ" to "Metis Smart Quotes"

Metis Smart Modeling - Systems

2011-09-02T09:40:41Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSQ" to "Metis Smart Quotes"

== Systems ==

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystems.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

===System Properties===

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''System'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
DESCR
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Group of systems'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingGroupOfSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Applications'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingApplicationIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
DESCR Applications are also sometimes called subsystems.
|-
|}

a description can be added in all of the active languages.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

The user also has the possibility of setting other various parameters, such as:

'''Remark'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.

'''Product Name'''
A system can also be assigned a name using the text field. This information is also known as the "Internal Product Name", and is limited to 8 characters. All systems which have an "Internal Product Name" will bear a White Flag. When an offer contains a system with this White Flag, the system must comply with defined processes in order to be valid.

'''Disable'''
A system can also be disabled. Once disabled, the System will appear in red in the various lists of Metis Smart Modeling.

'''System Family'''
In order to be displayed in Metis Smart Quotes, a system, a group of systems or an application has to be part of a family of systems. This drop-down list allows to select the appropriate family for the current system.

'''Hierarchy'''
A default hierarchy can be linked to a system. This setting will pre-select the defined hierarchy by Metis Smart Quotes when an item is added manually to an offer.

====Pictures====
Each system or application can be completed with a picture. The procedure is similar to selecting a picture for a product as described in ...

Pictures can be set as conditional to value set in the offer. Defining rules for pictures is quite a straightforward process. Conditions can be defined to automatically choose which image will be displayed to represent a system in QSBW.

Pictures can be assigned in the same way for Groups of Systems and Applications.

====Models====
Material and service models can be assigned or linked to each offer type relating to a specific system. In order to do that, under the "Models" tab of the edition window of a system there a table/list which displays all the defined offer types. In the second column, it is possible to double-click in order to bring up a windows where a model can be select for this offer type and system. Validation is required in order to store the selection.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsEditModel.PNG‎|center|850x860px|link=]]

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

====Limits====

This section allows to assign limits (Positions, Attributes, or Variables) to each system, group of systems or application. Those limits will then be used when comparing several system in order to highlight the limits which have been crossed by the input given in the masks.

====Comparison====
The comparison function allows to select different systems to be compared to other systems or applications.

====Default Configuration====
This section allows to determine default configurations for systems, groups of systems and applications using variables. Those value are closely linked to the use of models to work with the system, group of system or application. The concept is that they will be automatically used as input for the models without requiring input from the Metis Smart Quotes user. It particularly practical when requiring base value for a specific system. For example, in the case of a small business server, the number of users.

====Linked With====

Applications are systems which are linked to other systems and which can can only be used in Metis Smart Quotes if the "main" system is inserted in the offer. They are often also called "subsystems". The linked with tab will show the link between the selected system and "subsystems". Applying changes is done be using the two arrows between the two lists. The left one shows what is linked to the current system and the right one what is compatible for being linked to it. Moving entries from one list to the other is all that is required in order to configure the links.

{{Note| In the case a system is selected, the information displayed in the tab will show the applications linked to it. In the case an application is selected, it will show all the systems to which it is linked.
}}

===Groups of System ===
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared.

When applying a model, QSPM will access all of the information available within the group of systems to choose the “best option” depending upon the client's needs (“best option” meaning the lowest priced system).

To best compare systems, QSPM must have access to the information linked to all of the available systems. Groups of Systems are very useful when choosing between different alternatives from the client's point of view.

In a Group of System, the following information can be provided:
* Description (same as for systems)
* Remark (same as for systems)
* Product Name (same as for systems)
* Disbale (same as for systems)
* System Family (Family or families in which this group his listed)
* Pictures (Picture(s) linked to the group)
* Models (models to be used when this group is inserted in an offer in Metis Smart Quotes)
* Linked With (systems included in this group)

===Applications===

Applications, also called sub-system, are fully configurable system which can only exist in Metis Smart Quotes when used along with a "main-system". They hold the same properties as regular systems but need to be linked to a "main-system" in order to be accessible in Metis Smart Quotes.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

== Systems Families ==

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCFamilies.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

{{Warning
| It is important not to confuse the use of Families with Group of Systems: Families are intended to put together systems which resemble other systems. Group of Systems are intended to group systems that can be compared to one another.
}}

Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes

2011-09-02T09:40:38Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSQ" to "Metis Smart Quotes"

== Attributes ==

In Metis, attributes are additional position related information which can be defined as being basically anything. The user can define as many attributes as necessary (they will then appear in every position). Along with every attribute, the user can also specify the appropriate [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] (for example, service hours will have “hours” as quantity units. Most commonly attributes are used to ...

The main type of attributes which will be defined here are, for example, service hours. By default, all attributes will be available for all positions. A real link between a position and its attribute is only done once the attribute holds a value for a specific product. This allows, through Metis Smart Modeling, to set numerical characteristics to positions. Once a position is inserted in an offer, the defined attributes is displayed and can be modified ( based on [[#Systems|defined settings]]), but attributes for which no values have been given in Metis Smart Modeling can edited in Metis Smart Quotes.

Attributes can also be used to specify such product properties as:
* Technical information (I/O points, electrical consumption, …)
* Additional descriptive information (weight, size, …)
* Etc…

Attributes can be used in rules as input. It is especially useful in Service models.

{{Note
| Attributes are version specific.
}}

=== Basic Properties ===

Each attribute defined in Metis Smart Modeling is based on the following information:

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attribute Name'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | The name which will be used to identify the attribute within the whole Metis environment.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''Quantity Unit'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Optional [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] related to the attribute. (i.e. KG for weight)
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | '''Description'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | The name which will be displayed to the user in Metis Smart Modeling and Metis Smart Quotes for the attribute. It can be provided in all available languages.
|-
|}

{{Note
| If the required quantity unit doesn't appear in the list, it needs to be created using the available functionality in the "Positions" menu.
}}

=== Values ===
Summary of all values given for the current attribute within the list of positions. Selection can be done on the content of the list :
* Display only positions with a value
* Display all positions

All of the values entered here may be displayed and used in the calculation process in QSBW. By sorting and searching through the list, defining values for position can be done in no time. On the other hand, it is also a great way to verify values which have been imported through the various data import functions available by default in Metis Smart Modeling or added to the environment for based on organization specific requirements.

=== Systems ===
Define the editing / modification possibilities of the value of the current attributes within Metis Smart Quotes based on the system used in an offer.

As certain values assigned to positions through an attribute sometimes should be modified once the position is used in an offer in Metis Smart Quotes, Metis Smart Modeling allows to set for which system the current attribute is either editable, visible or completely hidden. By selecting the most suitable state in the drop-down list, the selection is set for the listed system.

Possible selection :
* Undefined - this is the default state and is equivalent to editable
* Editable - the end user can edit this attribute
* Not editable - the end user cannot edit this attribute
* Invisible - end user will not see this attribute, but it can be used for modelling

== Attributes Sets ==

As described above, each position can hold a single value for each attribute. In some cases, it might be relevant for one position to have different attribute values depending on the system in which it is used. For example

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

Can be used to set identical values to attributes in sets. If no values have been set specifically to the position, it will take the value defined in the attributes set.

In the Attributes Set subsection, the user can define groups of attributes which will inherit the same attributes.
The first step is to create the group using the top menu or right-click menu in the uppermost table.
Then, the user should define the value which should be linked to the different attributes.
The third step is to link the item to the sets.
As shown in the image below, using the and buttons, the user can specify which products should be included in the set and thus inherit the attribute values.

NOTE If an item is defined in a set, the attribute values given directly to the item will have priority over the ones given to the whole set.

Metis Smart Modeling - Additional considerations to models

2011-09-02T09:40:37Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSQ" to "Metis Smart Quotes"

== Limits linked to systems ==
Using the limits defined on a system description is a key aspects of the modelization of group of systems. Those limits will be used by Metis Smart Quotes to display the results of the systems in the group and show the ones which have been "crossed". Implementing them on the different systems is a must in order for the end-user to make an informed selection of the appropriate system for his customer.

For more information about limits please visit the corresponding section.

== System pictures ==
During the modelization process of systems, thoughts should be given the visualization of those systems in Metis Smart Quotes. Metis allows to set different pictures for one system based on a variable.

For more information about system pictures please visit the corresponding section.

== Attributes linked to positions ==
Using attributes in models, instantiation, considerations.

== Influence of prices in the models ==
When more than one result is obtained from the models, it will automatically select the least expensive one! Great care should be given to the debugging of models as results may vary based on the prices stored in the database. For instance for a position, its price could be different for every price category. This means that the result of a formula, which can select between multiple solutions, like the optimum rule, the same inputs may produce different outputs depending on the price category selected either in Metis Smart Quotes or in the debugging mode.

== Debugging a model ==
Using Metis Smart Quote to debug a model, letting users report issues.

== Enabling visual flags in Metis Smart Quote ==
?? Grey and white flags ??

== Working with model filters ==

{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; background-color : transparent;"
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Country based filter''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
???
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
''Variants''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Based on the definition of variants on positions, the result of a specific rule may vary.
|-
|}

== Summary of model examples ==
{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; background-color : transparent;"
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Example 1''' - XXX
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |

|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Example 2''' - XXX
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |

|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Example 2''' - XXX
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |

|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Example 3''' - XXX
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |

|-
|}

Metis Smart Modeling - Rules

2011-09-02T09:40:35Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSM" to "Metis Smart Modeling"

Description of the general concept of rules and what they are used for.

== What is a rule? ==
[[Image:Model_Exec_3.png|thumb|upright=0.5|alt=Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description|Metis Smart Quote Rule Execution Description]]
a determinate method for performing a mathematical operation and obtaining a certain result

Detailed description of a rule and its components.

Link to the execution process of models.

A rule may be made of three different parts which can work together :
*'''Filter'''
*'''Formula'''
*'''Add-On's''''

A rule may use the following items in its different parts :
{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Object
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Positions'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingPositionIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
material and service '''Positions''' (input and output) can be used as a parameter (taking into account the quantity) or as output (setting the quantity through the execution of the formula)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attributes'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
()
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input only) [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attributes]] values added over the complete offer can be used as input for rules
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input and output) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account its value) or as an output in the formula or add-on part of a rule (the obtained value will be set to the variable)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Group of variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingVariableGroupIcon.png‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
(input only) can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account the sum of all the positions and variables it includes)
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Assembly of groups of variables'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
(input only)can be used as a parameter in the filter and formula part of a rule (taking into account the sum of all the positions, variables and groups of variables it includes)
|-
|}

== Creating a rule ==
Using the ADD button,

Rule structure

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCRulesDef.PNG|center|706x860px]]

Rules are divided into 7 categories, and can be defined...

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

=== Description ===
Mandatory and optional fields (use and where will the information be displayed)

When creating a new rule, the user has the possibility of entering a comment that will be displayed on reports.

Once the rule has been saved, the ID field will automatically be completed by Metis Smart Modeling. The generated identification code is unique worldwide and can be useful for searching for a rule or debugging it, if necessary.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="100%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; background-color : transparent;"
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''No treatment of the rest''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If this checkbox is ticked, any fractions of output resulting from a rule will not be taken into account. This means that the result will only be composed of whole units.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''White Flag (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
White flags, simply by the presence of an system name, are considered to be applied on the order level. The influence in MSQ is that the ordering process will be blocked for the MSQ end user until an external configurator control can be performed, but it will still be possible to view and print offer documents. There is no icon to represent the White Flag applied on the order level.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
''Grey Flag (Order)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Grey Flags are intended for systems which do not have system names. Similar to the White Flag, they also require MSQ end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems with Grey Flags will have to be performed manually by an especially authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like White Flags. Will be applied on the order level, meaning that the ordering process will be blocked for the MSQ end user until a manual control can be performed. It will still be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents, however.
|-
| width="20%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
''Grey Flag (Offer)''
| width="80%" style="vertical-align: top; background-color : transparent; border-style: solid; border-color: transparent; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Grey Flags are intended for systems which do not have system names. Similar to the White Flag, they also require MSQ end users to perform a mandatory control of system configuration. The mandatory controls of systems with Grey Flags will have to be performed manually by an especially authorized user as opposed to being handled by an external configurator control like White Flags. Will be applied on the offer level. It is basically the same as the Grey Flag (Order) with the added restriction that it will not be possible for the end user to view and print offer documents.
|-
|}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="50%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''White Flag''' (EKB Name)
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | '''Grey Flag''' (no EKB Name)
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Applied on the '''Order Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Ordering process blocked until manual control has been completed.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Applied on the '''Offer Level'''
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until external configurator control has been completed.
| width="40%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
Ordering process and Document Generation blocked until manual control has been competed.
|-
|}

{{Note
| Whether the Grey Flag has been placed on the order level or offer level, there will be no difference in the display in QSBW. The same small yellow icon will be displayed for either one.
}}

{{Note
| Only one type of Grey Flag can be active on a rule at a time.
}}

{{Note
| The White Flag (Offer) and a Grey Flag can be active on the same rule at the same time. However, Grey Flags will not have any influence on a system which has a system name. Systems which have a system name will only take into account whether or not the White Flag (Offer) has been applied. Conversely, the White Flag (Offer) setting will have no influence on systems which do not have a system name.
}}

=== Filter ===
Enabling the rule only under specific conditions
The Variable Filter validates the rule according to variables, products, or groups of variables.

To select a new variable, select a line and click to enter. Give the name, or part of the name of your parameter or a space to select all and click “ENTER.”

=== Formula ===
Setting up the rule, see formula types for detailed description of how to setup each of them

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

=== Add-on ===
Additional results from the rule based on the result of the "formula"

{{Note
| When specifying output, you will only have the choice between “Product” and “Variable”, as it is not possible to set the value of a group of variables or an [[Description_of_the_Menu_Attributes|attribute]].
}}

=== Rule types ===

Rules which can be configured in Metis are divided into 7 categories:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type of rule
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Single selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleSIngle.PNG|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The [[#Single_Selection|Single Selection]] rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Table selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleTable.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Table_Selection|Table Selection]] is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Optimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleOptimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Optimal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Maximal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMaximal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Maximal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Minimal selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleMinimal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
[[#Minimal_Selection|LINK]]
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Formula selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleFormula.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The goal of a [[#Formulas|formula based rule]] is to use arithmetic and logic function to calculate an output for a rule.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''External selection'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingRuleExternal.PNG‎|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The goal of an [[#External_Selection|external rule]] is to use a third party application (software) to calculate the output of a rule.
|-
|}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Value
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q from'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the lower limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q from" value is 5, then the rule will provide an output. The "Q from" value can also be considered as a base value for the system in which the model is used.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q to'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define the upper limit for which the rule is valid and should be executed. For example, if the "Q in" value is 6 and that the "Q to" value is 4, then the rule will not provide an output.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Q in'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Q out'''
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
The value set in this field will define
|-
|}

==== Single Selection ====
The single selection rule tests an input and calculates the defined output based on a simple logical relation. The Input "object" can be of any type available, but the output one can only be a position or a variable. If the input is set to be a variable, its value may come directly from a field placed in a mask or a default value. The output quantity ("Q out") is determined by the input quantity ("Q in"). If they are both set to "1", then for every number of input there will be an output. On the other hand, if the "Q out" fields is set to 2, it means that for every input there will be 2 output.

{{Warning
| Beware that if the "Q in" field is left empty, the output will be equal to the input. The output value will always be equal to the input value, for any “Q in” value.
}}

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

A filter or limit to the execution of the rule can be set with the "Q from" and "Q to" fields by giving a scope in which the input/output relation should be executed. If the "Q from" field is left empty, this means that the rule is valid for input values greater or equal than 0. An d if the "Q to" field is also left empty, then it means that the rule is valid up to infinite input values.

{{Note
| Only the input value will be considered by the range filter.
}}

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Output will have the same quantity as Input.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
5
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
1 output will be added to each group of 5 units of input.
If Q in = 3, Q out = 1

If Q in = 8, Q out = 2

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3

If the parameter ‘No Treatment of the rest' is activated, the result would be:
If Q in = 3, Q out = 0

If Q in = 8, Q out = 1

If Q in = 15, Q out = 3
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Table Selection====
The goal is to determine an output quantity within several ranges of input values.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q from
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q to
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
2
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
3
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the input in defined between 1 and 3, the output will be 2.
|-
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
12
| width="10%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
4
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the input is defined between 4 and 12, then the output will be 4.
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Optimal Selection ====
This very performing rule enables the automatic selection of the best alternative depending on the output quantity required and the related price. This rule is particularly appreciated in selecting products when one input corresponds to several possible output results.

This type of rule allows:
# Query of product quantity according to the selected product (from the highest to the lowest)
# Optimization of product quantity (priority 1: the least amount of cards possible)

Basically, the application will calculate all output as if they were "Single selection" rules and then compare all results based on the resulting price. With this result it will then chose the least expensive one as the output of the rule.

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q in
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Q out
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Remark
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
24 and 8
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
1 and 1
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
If the number of analogue ports needed is 30, the best configuration for the customer is to have 1 module with 24 ports and 1 with 8 ports.
If the number of analogue ports needed is 35, QS will control which configuration would be the best for the customer between 1 x 24 + 2 x 8 and 2 x 24. The least expensive solution will be preferred and set as output.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1, 100 and 1000
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
1 for each
| width="70%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
If the number of licenses needed is 850, QS will test the different possibilities and select the cheapest one:
* 8 x 100 + 50 x 1
* 9 x 100
* 1 x 1000
|-
|}

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Maximal Selection ====
This type of rule can be used when several input values influence a specific output. Each line will be used as a single criterion and Metis will return the higher result possible.

It is particularly useful when the goal is to define a minimal number of one position in order to satisfy several criteria.

When the input quantity is not within the indicated range (Q from – Q to), the line will not be valid, thus not considered by the rule.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

TABLE WITH SAMPLE VALUES

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Minimal Selection ====
This type of rule uses the same logic as the Maximal Rule, but the lowest value will be returned as an output result.

{{Note
| If the “Q from” field is left empty, this means ‘from 0'. If the “Q to” field is left empty, this means “up to ∞” (or > 999'999'999).
}}

TABLE WITH SAMPLE VALUES

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

==== Formulas ====
Mathematical formula

In some cases, the previous rules categories are not sufficient for a suitable result. The formula rules may be very helpful in calculating services associated to certain equipment.

The main mathematical functions that may be used in rules are described in the table below:

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Function
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Description
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Syntax
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Abs'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the absolute value of a numeric expression (integer or real).
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Abs(<Numeric>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real absolute value sought

<Numeric>: Numeric expression, integer or real numeric expression or numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Round'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the rounded value of a numeric value according to the specified number of decimal.
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Round(<Numeric Value> [,<Number of Decimals>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Integer or real rounded value of the specified numeric value.
<Numeric Value>: Real or currency numeric value to round. We recommend that you use the currency type in order to get reliable results.

'''Numeric Value'''
If <Numeric Value> is included between:

0 et 0.49: the number is rounded to 0. For example, 3.2 is rounded to 3 (no decimal).

0.5 and 0.99: the number is rounded to 1. For example, 3.7 is rounded to 4 (no decimal).
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsOdd'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an odd number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsOdd(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is odd, False otherwise.

<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IsEven'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Identifies an even number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IsEven(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Boolean true if the specified number is even, False otherwise.
<Number>: Integer numeric expression or integer number Integer numeric expression or integer number to identify.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Max'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the greatest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Max(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the greatest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Min'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the smallest of the value passed in parameter
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Min(<Value 1> [,<Value 2> [,<Value N>]])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Character string, integer or real the smallest of the values passed in parameter.

<Value 1>: Character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value 2>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.

<Value N>: Optional character string, integer or real value to compare.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''DecimalPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the decimal part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = DecimalPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''IntegerPart'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Returns the integer part of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = IntegerPart(<Number>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal part sought. Corresponds to the largest integer smaller than or equal to <Number>.

<Number>: Real number to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Power'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Raises a number to a power
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Power(<Number to Raise>, <Exponent>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real result of the <Number to Raise> to the power of <Exponent>.

<Number to Raise>: Integer or real number to raise to the power.

<Exponent>: Integer or real exponent.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Root'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the root of a number
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Root(<Number> [,<Root Factor>])

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real root of the number.

<Number>: Integer or real number to use.

<Root Factor>: Integer or real factor of the root (2 for a square root, 3 for a cubic root, ...). If this parameter is not specified, the square root of <Number> is returned.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Log'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the logarithm of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Log(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Ln'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the Napierian logarithm (reverse of exponential) of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Ln(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real decimal logarithm sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use. An error occurs if this parameter is a negative number or a null number??
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcSin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc sine of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcSin(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc sine (angle in degrees of the sine) of the specified numeric value, found in the [-90, 90] interval.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (sine) to use. This value must be found in the [-1,1] interval. Otherwise, an error occurs.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the arc tangent of a numeric value (integer or real)
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArcTan(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real arc tangent (angle in degrees of the tangent) of the specified numeric value, included in the [-90,90] interval (excluding bounds).

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value (tangent) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''ArcCos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the arc cosine of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = ArCos(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>:

<Numeric Value>:
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Cos'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cosine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Cos(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cosine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. This parameter can have any value: the cosine calculation is performed "modulo 360".
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''CoTan'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle cotangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = CoTan(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real cotangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 0°, 180° or -180°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Exp'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the exponential of a numeric value
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Exp(<Numeric Value>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real exponential sought.

<Numeric Value>: Integer or real numeric value to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Sin'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculate the angle sine
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Sin(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real sine of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Tangent'''
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
Calculates the angle tangent
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
<Result> = Tangent(<Angle>)

'''Parameter Details'''

<Result>: Real tangent of the specified angle.

<Angle>: Integer or real angle (in degrees) to use. An error occurs if this parameter is set to 90°, -90°, 270° or -270°.
|-
| width="20%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="30%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
???
| width="50%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
???
|-
|}

==== External Selection====
For very complex rules, an external file might be used to implement them in Metis Smart Modeling. The purpose of this rule type is to allow the development of algorithms which may not be handled in Metis. The file linked to such rule should a compiled program which can be started by providing at least one parameter and which returns '''only one''' value. This file can be searched through the External File Name button on the right. In order for a new file to be displayed in that list it has to be "imported" through the ... .

EXAMPLE OF USE BASED ON SCENARIO

=== Testing rules ===

All rules which have been created in Metis Smart Modeling can be tested in various ways, either on their own or as part of the group they belong. This section of the manual will focus on testing a rule by itself, for more information about other tests please refer to XXX.

INPUT VALUES (Filter and input)
In the above table, value can be given to specific inputs for testing the current rule. The listed inputs include both the ones used as input for the rule and the ones used in the filter part of the rule. It goes without saying that in order to get a result from the test that all filters need to be valid.

OUTPUT VALUES (Output and Add-on)
In the lower table, results will be displayed based on the inputs given and the rule itself. The listed result include both the output defined in the rule and the "Add-on" specified.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

{{Note
| Because optimal rule take into account the prices of the various possible results, the testing window allows to set which "Price category" should be used for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

{{Note
| Because some products may not be available for specific variants, the testing window allows to set a preferred "Variant" for the current test. Thus the result will take into account the selection.
}}

== Structuring rules together ==
Execution scheme and considerations (changing execution order)

re-use concept; duplicate, copy and move group of rules

One simple example to described the importance of planning in advance the structure of the rules within a group or the groups themselves is in the scope of the configuration of a computer the calculation of the memory modules required. One way to accommodate this situation is to let the user input the requested amount of memory he would like to have configured in his machine.

The first rule will determine the number of 1 GB modules required to suit his needs. For example the input is 4 GB and the result is 4 modules of 1 GB each. The situation would be more complicated if the user had chosen 8 GB and that the machine could only hold 4 modules in total. This means that the model requires a second rule to check the number of 1 GB module against the number of slots available. In the example of a input equal to 8, the resulting number of modules is 8. The second rule could then take this value and modify the result to 2 GB modules thus making it possible to be installed on the machine.

Because in this situation the second needs to have the result of the first one available in order to use it has an input it is necessary that second be placed in another group of rules which should be executed after the one containing the first rule.

{{Note
| On the main rule screen, listing all rules within a single group, they can be sorted. This functionality is only a visual help for the user. Based on the execution scheme of models, sorting rule within a group doesn't have any effect on the result of the group. If rule need to be executed a sequential order, then they should be placed in sequential groups.
}}

== Modifying a rule ==
Using the EDIT button, consideration for rules which are used in more then one group of rules.

== Deleting a rule ==
Using the DELETE button, consideration for rules which are used in more then one group of rules.

Metis Smart Modeling - Masks

2011-09-02T09:40:15Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSM" to "Metis Smart Modeling"

Metis Smart Modeling - Systems

2011-09-02T09:40:14Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSM" to "Metis Smart Modeling"

== Systems ==

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystems.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

===System Properties===

{| class="wikitable centre" width="90%" style="border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey;"
|-
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Type
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | Icons
! scope=col style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Description
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''System'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
DESCR
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Group of systems'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingGroupOfSystemIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" |
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared.
|-
| width="15%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
'''Applications'''
| width="5%" style="text-align:center; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" |
[[File:MetisSmartModelingApplicationIcon.png|link=]]
| width="80%" style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" |
DESCR Applications are also sometimes called subsystems.
|-
|}

a description can be added in all of the active languages.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

The user also has the possibility of setting other various parameters, such as:

'''Remark'''
Remarks are intended for internal use only and will not be accessible in MSQ.

'''Product Name'''
A system can also be assigned a name using the text field. This information is also known as the "Internal Product Name", and is limited to 8 characters. All systems which have an "Internal Product Name" will bear a White Flag. When an offer contains a system with this White Flag, the system must comply with defined processes in order to be valid.

'''Disable'''
A system can also be disabled. Once disabled, the System will appear in red in the various lists of Metis Smart Modeling.

'''System Family'''
In order to be displayed in MSQ, a system, a group of systems or an application has to be part of a family of systems. This drop-down list allows to select the appropriate family for the current system.

'''Hierarchy'''
A default hierarchy can be linked to a system. This setting will pre-select the defined hierarchy by MSQ when an item is added manually to an offer.

====Pictures====
Each system or application can be completed with a picture. The procedure is similar to selecting a picture for a product as described in ...

Pictures can be set as conditional to value set in the offer. Defining rules for pictures is quite a straightforward process. Conditions can be defined to automatically choose which image will be displayed to represent a system in QSBW.

Pictures can be assigned in the same way for Groups of Systems and Applications.

====Models====
Material and service models can be assigned or linked to each offer type relating to a specific system. In order to do that, under the "Models" tab of the edition window of a system there a table/list which displays all the defined offer types. In the second column, it is possible to double-click in order to bring up a windows where a model can be select for this offer type and system. Validation is required in order to store the selection.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCSystemsEditModel.PNG‎|center|850x860px|link=]]

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

====Limits====

This section allows to assign limits (Positions, Attributes, or Variables) to each system, group of systems or application. Those limits will then be used when comparing several system in order to highlight the limits which have been crossed by the input given in the masks.

====Comparison====
The comparison function allows to select different systems to be compared to other systems or applications.

====Default Configuration====
This section allows to determine default configurations for systems, groups of systems and applications using variables. Those value are closely linked to the use of models to work with the system, group of system or application. The concept is that they will be automatically used as input for the models without requiring input from the MSQ user. It particularly practical when requiring base value for a specific system. For example, in the case of a small business server, the number of users.

====Linked With====

Applications are systems which are linked to other systems and which can can only be used in MSQ if the "main" system is inserted in the offer. They are often also called "subsystems". The linked with tab will show the link between the selected system and "subsystems". Applying changes is done be using the two arrows between the two lists. The left one shows what is linked to the current system and the right one what is compatible for being linked to it. Moving entries from one list to the other is all that is required in order to configure the links.

{{Note| In the case a system is selected, the information displayed in the tab will show the applications linked to it. In the case an application is selected, it will show all the systems to which it is linked.
}}

===Groups of System ===
Groups of System are intended to be used to group together Systems that can be compared.

When applying a model, QSPM will access all of the information available within the group of systems to choose the “best option” depending upon the client's needs (“best option” meaning the lowest priced system).

To best compare systems, QSPM must have access to the information linked to all of the available systems. Groups of Systems are very useful when choosing between different alternatives from the client's point of view.

In a Group of System, the following information can be provided:
* Description (same as for systems)
* Remark (same as for systems)
* Product Name (same as for systems)
* Disbale (same as for systems)
* System Family (Family or families in which this group his listed)
* Pictures (Picture(s) linked to the group)
* Models (models to be used when this group is inserted in an offer in MSQ)
* Linked With (systems included in this group)

===Applications===

Applications, also called sub-system, are fully configurable system which can only exist in MSQ when used along with a "main-system". They hold the same properties as regular systems but need to be linked to a "main-system" in order to be accessible in MSQ.

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

== Systems Families ==

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

[[File:MetisSmartModelingSCFamilies.PNG‎|center|850x860px]]

<mediaplayer width='535' height='300'>File:OLE_Tag_Suppport_Video.mp4</mediaplayer>

{{Warning
| It is important not to confuse the use of Families with Group of Systems: Families are intended to put together systems which resemble other systems. Group of Systems are intended to group systems that can be compared to one another.
}}

Metis Smart Modeling - Attributes

2011-09-02T09:40:11Z

Adminwiki: Text replace - "MSM" to "Metis Smart Modeling"

== Attributes ==

In Metis, attributes are additional position related information which can be defined as being basically anything. The user can define as many attributes as necessary (they will then appear in every position). Along with every attribute, the user can also specify the appropriate [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] (for example, service hours will have “hours” as quantity units. Most commonly attributes are used to ...

The main type of attributes which will be defined here are, for example, service hours. By default, all attributes will be available for all positions. A real link between a position and its attribute is only done once the attribute holds a value for a specific product. This allows, through Metis Smart Modeling, to set numerical characteristics to positions. Once a position is inserted in an offer, the defined attributes is displayed and can be modified ( based on [[#Systems|defined settings]]), but attributes for which no values have been given in Metis Smart Modeling can edited in MSQ.

Attributes can also be used to specify such product properties as:
* Technical information (I/O points, electrical consumption, …)
* Additional descriptive information (weight, size, …)
* Etc…

Attributes can be used in rules as input. It is especially useful in Service models.

{{Note
| Attributes are version specific.
}}

=== Basic Properties ===

Each attribute defined in Metis Smart Modeling is based on the following information:

{| style="width:500px; border-collapse: separate; border-spacing: 0; border-width: 1px; border-style: solid; border-color: grey; padding: 5"
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" |
'''Attribute Name'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | The name which will be used to identify the attribute within the whole Metis environment.
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 1px 0" | '''Quantity Unit'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 1px 0" | Optional [[Description_of_the_Menu_Positions#Quantity_Units|quantity unit]] related to the attribute. (i.e. KG for weight)
|-
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 1px 0 0" | '''Description'''
|style="border-style: solid; border-color: grey; border-width: 0 0 0 0" | The name which will be displayed to the user in Metis Smart Modeling and MSQ for the attribute. It can be provided in all available languages.
|-
|}

{{Note
| If the required quantity unit doesn't appear in the list, it needs to be created using the available functionality in the "Positions" menu.
}}

=== Values ===
Summary of all values given for the current attribute within the list of positions. Selection can be done on the content of the list :
* Display only positions with a value
* Display all positions

All of the values entered here may be displayed and used in the calculation process in QSBW. By sorting and searching through the list, defining values for position can be done in no time. On the other hand, it is also a great way to verify values which have been imported through the various data import functions available by default in Metis Smart Modeling or added to the environment for based on organization specific requirements.

=== Systems ===
Define the editing / modification possibilities of the value of the current attributes within MSQ based on the system used in an offer.

As certain values assigned to positions through an attribute sometimes should be modified once the position is used in an offer in MSQ, Metis Smart Modeling allows to set for which system the current attribute is either editable, visible or completely hidden. By selecting the most suitable state in the drop-down list, the selection is set for the listed system.

Possible selection :
* Undefined - this is the default state and is equivalent to editable
* Editable - the end user can edit this attribute
* Not editable - the end user cannot edit this attribute
* Invisible - end user will not see this attribute, but it can be used for modelling

== Attributes Sets ==

As described above, each position can hold a single value for each attribute. In some cases, it might be relevant for one position to have different attribute values depending on the system in which it is used. For example

Description of the different functionalities and their impact on the other windows/menus of Metis.

Can be used to set identical values to attributes in sets. If no values have been set specifically to the position, it will take the value defined in the attributes set.

In the Attributes Set subsection, the user can define groups of attributes which will inherit the same attributes.
The first step is to create the group using the top menu or right-click menu in the uppermost table.
Then, the user should define the value which should be linked to the different attributes.
The third step is to link the item to the sets.
As shown in the image below, using the and buttons, the user can specify which products should be included in the set and thus inherit the attribute values.

NOTE If an item is defined in a set, the attribute values given directly to the item will have priority over the ones given to the whole set.

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2011-06-03T14:13:37Z

Adminwiki: Quotes

* Navigation
** mainpage | Home Page
** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page|Metis Smart Modeling User Manual
** Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quotes User Manual
** Metis OLE Tags User Manual Home Page | Metis OLE Tags User Manual
** Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual
** Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual
* SEARCH

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2011-05-25T07:58:32Z

Adminwiki:

* Navigation
** mainpage | Home Page
** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page|Metis Smart Modeling User Manual
** Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote User Manual
** Metis OLE Tags User Manual Home Page | Metis OLE Tags User Manual
** Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual
** Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual
* SEARCH

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2011-05-12T13:36:05Z

Adminwiki:

* Navigation
** mainpage|mainpage-description
** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page|Metis Smart Modeling User Manual
** Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote User Manual
** Metis OLE Tags User Manual Home Page | Metis OLE Tags User Manual
** Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual
** Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual
* SEARCH

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2011-05-12T12:09:29Z

Adminwiki:

* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage-description
** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page|Metis Smart Modeling User Manual
** Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote User Manual
** Metis OLE Tags User Manual Home Page | Metis OLE Tags User Manual
** Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual
** Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual
* SEARCH

MediaWiki:Sidebar

2011-05-12T12:06:54Z

Adminwiki: Created page with "* navigation ** mainpage|mainpage-description ** Metis Smart Modeling User Manual ** [[Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | ..."

* navigation
** mainpage|mainpage-description
** [[Metis Smart Modeling User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling User Manual]]
** [[Metis Smart Quote User Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote User Manual]]
** [[Metis OLE Tags User Manual Home Page | Metis OLE Tags User Manual]]
** [[Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Modeling Unicode Manual]]
** [[Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual Home Page | Metis Smart Quote Unicode Manual]]
* SEARCH
* LANGUAGES